NP5-MQ000B

Cat. No. V096-E1-03 NP-series NP3-MQ000@ NP3-MQ001@ NP5-MQ000@ NP5-MQ001@ NP5-SQ000@ NP5-SQ001@ NP-NPDC0-V1 Programmable Terminal NP-Designer USER’S MANUAL NP-series NP3-MQ000@ NP3-MQ001@ NP5-MQ000@ NP5-MQ001@ NP5-SQ000@ NP5-SQ001@ NP-NPDC0-V1 Programmable Terminal NP-Designer User’s Manual Revised April 2009 iv Introduction Thank you for purchasing an NP-series Programmable Terminal. NP-series PTs are designed to transfer data and information in FA production sites. Please be sure that you understand the functions and performance of the PT before attempting to use it. Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent). • Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities. • Personnel in charge of designing FA systems. • Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems. • Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities. General Precautions This manual provides information for connecting and setting up an NP-series PT. Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the PT and keep this manual close at hand for reference during installation and operation. © OMRON, 2008 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication. v vi Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments. Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY. In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted. IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR. vii Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products. At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products: • Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this manual. • Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations. • Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products. NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM. PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any consequence thereof. viii Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown. PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability. ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions. ix x Safety Precautions Notation Used for Safety Information The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product. The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety. Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions. The following notation is used. !WARNING Precautions for Safe Use Precautions for Correct Use Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in minor or moderate injury, or may result in serious injury or death. Additionally there may be significant property damage. Supplementary comments on what to do or avoid doing, to use the product safely. Supplementary comments on what to do or avoid doing, to prevent failure to operate, or undesirable effect on product performance. Symbols Prohibition Indicates a general prohibition Caution Indicates general cautionary, warning, or danger level information xi ! WARNING After the NP-series PT has been installed, qualified personnel must confirm the installation, and must conduct test operations and maintenance. The qualified personnel must be qualified and authorized to secure safety at each phases of design, installation, running, maintenance, and disposal of system. A qualified person in charge, who is familiar with the machine, must conduct and verify the installation of the NP-series PT. Do not use the PT touch switch input functions for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible, or for emergency switch applications. Do not press two or more touch switches at the same time. If doing so, other switch allocated between these switches may be operated. Do not dismantle, repair, or modify the product. Doing so may lead to loss of safety functions. xii Precautions for Safe Use • When unpacking the Units and peripheral devices, check carefully for any external scratches or other damage. Also, shake the products gently and check for any abnormal sound. • Always install the Unit in the control panel. • The mounting panel must be between 1.6 and 2.5 mm thick. Tighten the Mounting Brackets evenly to a torque of 0.7 N·m to maintain water and dust resistance. Make sure the panel is not dirty or warped and that it is strong enough to hold the Units. • Do not let metal particles enter the Units when preparing the panel. • Do not connect an AC power supply to the DC power terminals. • Use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply with minimal fluctuation voltage to the Unit. Ensure that a stable power output can be provided even if a 10-ms interruption occurs at the input. Tighten the terminal block screws to a torque of 0.51 N·m. Rated power supply voltage: 24 VDC (Allowable range: 21.6 to 27.6 VDC) Capacity: 12 W minimum • Do not perform a dielectric voltage test. • Ground the Unit correctly to prevent malfunctions caused by noise. • Do not touch the surface of the circuit board or the components mounted on it with your bare hands. Discharge any static electricity from your body before handling the board. • Confirm that the current capacity of the connected device is 250 mA or less before using 5VDC power supply from the pin 6 of the serial port COM1 connectors. The 5VDC output of the Unit is 250 mA maximum at 5 V ±5%. • Turn OFF the power supply before connecting or disconnecting cables. • The tightening torque of the serial port COM1 is 0.6 N·m. The tightening torque of the serial port COM2 is 0.2 N·m. • The maximum tensile load for cables is 30 N. Do not apply loads greater than this. • Confirm the safety of the system before turning ON or OFF the power supply. • The whole system may stop depending on how the power supply is turned ON or OFF. Turn ON or OFF the power supply according to the specified procedure. • Start actual system application only after sufficiently checking screen data, macros, and the operation of the program in the host. • To ensure the safety of the system, incorporate a program that can check that the Unit is properly operating. • Before initializing screen data, confirm that existing data is backed up at a computer. • To use numeric input functions safely, always make maximum and minimum limit settings. • An image will be burnt onto the screen if the same pattern is continuously displayed for a long period of time (24 hours or longer as a guideline). To prevent screen burn, use a screen saver or switch displays periodically. • Commercially available and recommended USB Hubs do not have the same specifications as the NP-series PT. Normal operation may not be possible in environments subject to noise or static electricity. When using USB Hubs, be sure to provide sufficient measures to prevent noise and static electricity, or install in a location that is not subject to noise or static electricity. • Do not connect the USB connector to any device that is not applicable. • Before connecting the USB connector to a device, make sure that the device is free of damage. • Do not press the touch switch with a force greater than 30 N. • Confirm the safety of the system before pressing touch switches. • Signals from the touch switches may not be input if the switches are pressed consecutively at high speed. Confirm each input before proceeding to the next one. xiii • Do not accidentally press touch switches when the backlight is not lit or when the display does not appear. • Do not operate the touch switches with tools including screwdriver. • Touch panel resistance may change over time, causing the touch points to shift. Periodically perform the calibration. • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile solvents, and do not use chemically treated cloths. • When mounting the Battery, be sure to use the correct Battery and mount it correctly. • Do not attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery. • Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or subjected to excessive shock. • When replacing the battery, always backup data before turning off the power to the Unit. If the battery is removed, the data stored in the Unit will be deleted. • Dispose of the Units and batteries according to local ordinances as they apply. • The backlight in the Unit contains mercury. Do not dispose of the Unit together with waste to be processed at disposal plants. Dispose of the Unit according to all local laws, regulations, and ordinances. • The backlights of the Units cannot be replaced by the user. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. • The Unit may not be usable in locations subject to long-term exposure to oil or water. The gasket will deteriorate after long-time use. Inspect the gasket on a regular basis. If deterioration is found, contact your OMRON representative. xiv Precautions for Correct Use • Do not install the Unit in the following places: • Locations subject to severe changes in temperature • Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications • Locations subject to high humidity that may result in condensation. • Locations subject to exposure to chemicals. • Locations subject to exposure to oil. • Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases • Locations subject to excessive shock or vibration. • Locations directly subject to wind or rain. • Locations subject to strong ultraviolet light. • Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations: • Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise from other devices • Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields • Locations close to power supplies • Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation. xv Conforming Directive The NP-series PTs conform to the EMC Directive. EMC Directive Conformance OMRON products are designed as electrical devices for use built into other devices or the overall machine. As individual devices, they comply with the related EMC standards (see note) so that they can more easily be built into other devices or the overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards. Whether they conform to the standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by the customer. EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed. The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards. Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows: EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN 61131-2 EMI (Electromagnetic Interference): EN 61131-2 (Radiated emission: 10-m regulations) Complying with EC Directives NP-series PTs comply with EC Directives. Observe the following precautions to ensure that the customer's device and the overall machine also comply with EC Directives. 1. The PT is designed for installation inside a control panel. The PT must be installed within a control panel. 2. Use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply to the PT. Ensure that a stable power output can be provided even if a 10-ms interruption occurs at the input. 3. The PT conforms to the EN 61131-2, but the radiated emission characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring, and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives. 4. The NP-series PTs are Class A products. It may cause radio interference in residential areas, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures to reduce interference. xvi Notation and Terminology The following notation and terminology are used in this manual. Notation Reference Indicates additional information on operation, descriptions or settings. CS1G-CPU@@-VI @ used in this manual indicates one character. For example, “CS1G-CPU@@-VI” indicates CS1G-CPU42-VI, CS1G-CPU43-VI, CS1G-CPU44-VI and CS1GCPU45-VI. Terminology PT In this manual, indicates an NP-series Programmable Terminal. NP Series Indicates products in the OMRON NP@@ Series of Programmable Terminals, unless otherwise specified. PLC Indicates a Programmable Controller in the OMRON SYSMAC CP, CS/CJ, C, or CVM1/CV Series of Programmable Controllers. Indicates products in the OMRON SYSMAC CP Series of Programmable Controllers: CP1L and CP1H. Indicates Programmable Controllers in the OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ Series of Programmable Controllers: CS1G, CS1H, CS1G-H, CS1H-H, CJ1G, CJ1M. Indicates products in the OMRON SYSMAC C Series of Programmable Controllers: C200HX(-Z), C200HG(-Z), C200HE(-Z), CQM1, CQM1H, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C. CP Series CS/CJ Series C Series CVM1/CV Series Indicates products in the OMRON SYSMAC CVM1/ CV Series of Programmable Controllers: CV500, CV1000, CV2000, CVM1 Serial Communications Unit Indicates a Serial Communications Unit for an OMRON CS/CJ-series PLC. Indicates a Serial Communications Board for an OMRON CS/CJ-series or CQM1H PLC. Indicates a Communications Board for an OMRON C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) PLC. Indicates a CPU Unit in the OMRON SYSMAC CP, CS/CJ, C, or CVM1/ CV Series of Programmable Controllers. Serial Communications Board Communications Board CPU Unit NP-Designer Host Indicates the OMRON CP-Designer (NP-NPDC0-V@). Indicates a device such as PLC functioning as the control device and interfaced with the NP-series PT. xvii About this Manual: Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of the NP-series PTs, including functions, features, connection types, and communications methods. Section 2 Part Name and Functions This section describes the part names and functions of the PT. Section 3 Installing the PT and Connecting Peripheral Devices This section describes the methods used to install the PT and connect peripheral devices. Section 4 System Menu This section describes the methods used to set and check various settings in the system menu of the PT. Section 5 Installing and Starting the NP-Designer The software “NP-Designer” is required to create screen data for the PT. This section describes the methods for installing and starting the NP-Designer. Section 6 NP-Designer Functions This section describes functions of the NP-Designer. Section 7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This section describes the maintenance and inspection methods for preventing errors occurring, and troubleshooting measures when errors occur in the PT. Appendices This section describes hardware specifications and methods for preparing connections cables, and provides lists of standard products. xviii Related Manuals The following table lists the device and software manuals used for reference. Device/Software NP Series Manual name User's Manual (This manual) Catalog No. V096 PLC Host Connection Manual SYSMAC CP Series CP1L CPU Unit Operation Manual V102 W462 SYSMAC CP Series CP1L CPU Unit Programming Manual SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) Installation Guide W451 W302 SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Operation Manual SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) Operation Manual W303 W322 SYSMAC CQM1 Operation Manual SYSMAC CQM1H Operation Manual W226 W363 SYSMAC CV Series CV500/CV1000/CV2000/CVM1 Programming Manual: Ladder Diagrams W202 SYSMAC CPM1A Operation Manual SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual W317 W352 SYSMAC CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C/SRM1(-V2) Programming Manual W353 SYSMAC CPM2C Operation Manual SYSMAC CS Series CS1G/H-CPU@@ Operation Manual W356 W339 SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units Operation Manual SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual W336 W393 SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programming Manual W394 SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Instruction Reference Manual SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programming Console Operation Manual W340 W341 SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Communications Command Reference Manual Programming Devices/ SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: C-series PLCs Software SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: CVM1 PLCs SYSMAC CPT Operation Manual CX-Programmer User Manual EJ1 Modular Temperature Controller User's Manual W342 W248 W249 W333 W437 H142 xix xx TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1-1 NP-series PT Functions and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1-2 Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1-3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1-4 Procedure for Running NP-series PTs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SECTION 2 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2-1 Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2-2 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 SECTION 3 Installing the PT and Connecting Peripheral Devices. . . . . 17 3-1 Installing the PT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3-2 Starting the PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3-3 Connecting the NP-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3-4 Connecting with a 1:1 NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3-7 Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3-8 Connecting to Temperature Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 3-9 Using USB Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 SECTION 4 System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 4-1 Displaying System Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 4-2 Functions of System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 SECTION 5 Installing and Starting NP-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 5-1 Preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 5-2 Installing/Uninstalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 5-3 Starting/Exiting NP-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 5-4 Installing USB Drivers for NP-series PTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 SECTION 6 NP-Designer Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 6-1 User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 6-2 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 6-3 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 xxi TABLE OF CONTENTS 6-4 Object Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 6-5 Macro Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 6-6 Control Block and Status Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 6-7 Internal Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 SECTION 7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 7-1 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 7-2 Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 7-3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 7-4 Requesting a Replacement PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Appendices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 A Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 B Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 C Connecting to RS-422A/485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 D Preparing Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 E Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 F List of Optional Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 xxii SECTION 1 Overview This section provides an overview of the NP-series PTs, including functions, features, connection types, and communications methods. 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 NP-series PT Functions and Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1-1-1 PT Functions for FA Manufacturing Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1-1-2 NP-series PT Operating System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1-2-1 4 What is an NT Link? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-2 Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1-2-3 Connecting to a Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1-2-4 Communicating with Another Company's PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1-3-1 Supported Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Procedure for Running NP-series PTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1 Section 1-1 NP-series PT Functions and Operations 1-1 NP-series PT Functions and Operations The NP Series offers advanced operator interfaces called Programmable Terminals that can be used to display required information and provide operating capabilities for FA manufacturing sites. This section describes the role and functions of the NP-series PTs for first-time users of Programmable Terminals. 1-1-1 PT Functions for FA Manufacturing Sites Line Operating Status Monitor Display NP-series PTs can be used to display information such as the operating status of the system and the devices. Graphs and other indicators can be used to better represent the information and make it easy to understand. Directions for FA Site Operators The PTs can be used to inform the operators of system and device errors and assist them in taking appropriate measures. Control Panel Switches The NP-series PTs allow the user to create various on-screen switches. By using touch switch inputs, operating results can be sent to the host. 1-1-2 NP-series PT Operating System Transferring Screen Data The screen data displayed on NP-series PTs is created using the NPDesigner on a computer and transferred to the PT through RS-232C or USB communications. Create screen data. RS-232C Screen Computer (NP-Designer) data Connect the computer to the PT only when transferring screen data to or from the NP-Designer. Screen data can also be transferred at high speed using a USB flash memory. USB Flash Memory Computer (NP-Designer) 2 Section 1-1 NP-series PT Functions and Operations Displaying Screens The information displayed on the screens is created using the NP-Designer on a computer and transferred to the PT. The required screens can be displayed by using commands from the host or touch switch operations. Host The required screens can be displayed by using commands from the host or touch switch operations. Reading Data from the Host A communications method such as NT Link is used to connect the host, and the required data is automatically read from the host. k NT Lin Host Sending Data to the Host Data input using touch switches (button ON/OFF status, numerals, and character strings) is sent to the host. Host Touch panel us, stat , etc. F F a t /O a ON eric d num 3 Section 1-2 Communications with the Host 1-2 Communications with the Host NP-series PTs allow the user to allocate words and bits in any PLC area for use in accessing the required display contents and storing input data. Operations that can be performed include reading and writing allocated word contents and bit status directly, changing the display status of objects on the PT screen, and controlling and providing notification of the PT status. The NP-series PTs also enable communications with more than one PLC. A host name is registered for each PLC connected, allowing access to any PLC areas by specifying the host name and address. NP-Series PT PLC DM Area I/O Area Auxiliary Area Timers/counters When using NP-series PTs, the host can be connected using any of the following methods. • 1:1 NT Link • 1:N NT Link (normal or high-speed) • Host Link 1-2-1 What is an NT Link? An NT Link is a method for high-speed communications between an OMRON PLC and an OMRON Programmable Terminal (PT) using a special protocol. One NP-series PT can be connected to each host. More than one NP-series PT cannot be connected to the same host. Also, if an NP-series PT is connected, then a PT that supports 1:N NT Links and PLC slaves that support Serial PLC Links cannot be connected. NP-series PTs can be connected to a host using either the 1:1 NT Link protocol or the 1:N NT Link protocol. CS/CJ-series and CP-series PLCs can also be connected using high-speed 1:N NT Link communications. For details on the PLCs that support highspeed 1:N NT Link communications, refer to Appendix E Standard Models. In the rest of this manual, “NT Link” refers to NT Link communications in general, “1:1 NT Link” refers to an NT Link in a 1:1 configuration only, and “1:N NT Links” refers to NT Links in a 1:N configuration only. Where necessary, “normal 1:N NT Links” and “high-speed 1:N NT Links” are used. When “1:N NT Links” is used alone, it refers to both normal and high-speed communications. 1-2-2 Host Link Host Link is a serial communications protocol for connecting an OMRON PT 1:1 to an OMRON host (a PLC) to read and write bits and words from the host. Host Link communications connect a PT to many different PLCs. 1-2-3 Connecting to a Temperature Controller OMRON EJ1 Modular Temperature Controllers can be connected with an RS485 connection. Use serial port COM2. 4 Communications with the Host 1-2-4 Section 1-2 Communicating with Another Company's PLCs The NP-series PTs can communicate with another company's PLCs. For details on manufactures and models of the supported PLCs, refer to NP Series Host Connection Manual. 5 Section 1-3 System Configuration 1-3 System Configuration The following information describes the system configuration using NP-series PTs. Refer to Appendix E Standard Models for details on available models. 1-3-1 Supported Peripheral Devices Host RS-232C cable (15 m max.) RS-422A/RS-485 cable (500 m max.) Personal computer Computer running Windows 2000 or XP USB Flash Memory Save screen data or the system program. NP-Designer NP-series PT RS-232C cable USB cable (See note 1.) *1 Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via USB for information on connecting the PT and computer with a USB cable. PTs (Refer to Appendix E Standard Models.) USB flash memory Only FAT32 formatted USB flash memory can be connected. NP-Designer NP-NPDC0-V1 (CD-ROM version) Reference The following optional products are available. (Refer to Appendix F List of Optional Products.) Replacement Battery 6 Manufacture OMRON Model CJ1W-BAT01 Section 1-4 Procedure for Running NP-series PTs 1-4 Procedure for Running NP-series PTs Use the following procedure to start up the NP Series system. Host PT Host settings Refer to following pages. 1:1 NT Link: 3-4 Connecting with a 1:1 NT Link 1:N Link: 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links NP-Designer Installation on the computer Panel Installation Refer to 3-1-2 Mounting the PT to the Control Panel. Refer to Section 5 Installing and Starting NP-Designer. Peripheral connections Power connections Refer to 3-1-3 Connecting the Power Supply See note 1. Power ON High-speed 1:N NT Link: 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Link Host Link: 3-7 Host Link System program installation Temperature Controllers: 3-8 Connecting to Temperature Controllers Refer to 3-9-1 Transferring Data with USB Flash Memory. See note 2. Screen creation Refer to Section 6 NP-Designer Functions. Screen transfer Refer to 3-9-1 Transferring Data with USB Flash Memory. Other Devices: 1-1 List of Supported Hosts in the Host Connection Manual System menu settings See note 3. Refer to Section 4 System Menu. PT connections Host connections Programming Settings/com check Operation System maintenance Note See note 4. (1) Run mode is entered automatically if screen data already exists. (2) The system program is installed in special situations only, such as when the system program is being changed or recovered. (3) The system menu can be displayed by operating the function switch, button to which system menu is assigned or switch on the back of the PT. (4) When errors occur during operation, check I/O and setting statuses as required. 7 Procedure for Running NP-series PTs 8 Section 1-4 SECTION 2 Part Names and Functions The part names and functions of the PT are described here. 2-1 Part Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2-2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 9 Section 2-1 Part Names 2-1 Part Names NP5-MQ000B/MQ000 Front Panel Function Switch. Used for input. POWER Indicator The light turns ON/OFF to indicate the ON/OFF condition of the power. Display 5.7-inch FSTN high luminance LCD The entire display is a touch panel that serves as an input device. Rear Panel Battery Cover The battery is installed underneath the cover. DIP Switch SW2 Slide Switch SW1 Used to switch to RS-422A/485 and set terminating resistance. Used to start the System Menu. DC Input Terminals USB Slave Connector Used to connect the 24 VDC power supply. It is a USB Type B connector. USB Host Connector Serial Port COM1 Connector This is a USB Type A connector. Uses an RS-232C 9-pin connector. Precautions for Safe Use 10 Serial Port COM2 Connector Uses an RS-422A/485 terminal block. Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF. Section 2-1 Part Names NP5-MQ001B/MQ001 Front Panel Function Switch. Used for input. POWER Indicator The light turns ON/OFF to indicate the ON/OFF condition of the power. Display 5.7-inch FSTN high luminance LCD The entire display is a touch panel that serves as an input device. Rear Panel Battery Cover The battery is installed underneath the cover. DIP Switch SW2 Slide Switch SW1 Used to switch to RS422A/485 and set terminating resistance. Used to start the System Menu. DC Input Terminals USB Slave Connector Used to connect the 24 VDC power supply. It is a USB Type B connector. USB Host Connector Serial Port COM1 Connector This is a USB Type A connector. Uses an RS-232C 9-pin connector. Precautions for Safe Use Serial Port COM2 Connector Uses an RS-422A/485 terminal block. Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF. 11 Section 2-1 Part Names NP3-MQ000B/MQ000 Front Panel Function Switch. Used for input. POWER Indicator The light turns ON/OFF to indicate the ON/OFF condition of the power. Display 3.8-inch STN high luminance LCD The entire display is a touch panel that serves as an input device. Rear Panel Battery Cover The battery is installed underneath the cover. DIP Switch SW2 Used to switch to RS-422A/485 and set terminating resistance. Slide Switch SW1 Used to start the System Menu. USB Host Connector It is a USB Type A connector. DC Input Terminals Used to connect the 24 VDC power supply. USB Slave Connector Serial Port COM1 Connector Serial Port COM2 Connector This is a USB Type B connector. Uses an RS-232C 9-pin connector. Uses an RS-422A/485 terminal block. Precautions for Safe Use 12 Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF. Section 2-1 Part Names NP3-MQ001B/MQ001 Front Panel Function Switch. Used for input. POWER Indicator The light turns ON/OFF to indicate the ON/OFF condition of the power. Display 3.8-inch STN high luminance LCD The entire display is a touch panel that serves as an input device. Rear Panel Battery Cover The battery is installed underneath the cover. DIP Switch SW2 Used to switch to RS-422A/485 and set terminating resistance. Slide Switch SW1 Used to start the System Menu. USB Host Connector It is a USB Type A connector. DC Input Terminals Used to connect the 24 VDC power supply. USB Slave Connector Serial Port COM1 Connector Serial Port COM2 Connector This is a USB Type B connector. Uses an RS-232C 9-pin connector. Uses an RS-422A/485 terminal block. Precautions for Safe Use Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF. 13 Section 2-2 Specifications 2-2 Specifications Touch Panel The touch switches on the front panel of the PT are used to perform input operations. Press the touch switches to perform operations such as switching screens and sending bit status to the host. ! WARNING Do not use the PT touch switch input functions for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible, or for emergency switch applications. Do not press two or more touch switches at the same time. If doing so, other switch between these switches may be operated. • Do not exceed a pressure of 30 N when pressing any of the touch switches. Precautions for Safe Use • Do not press the touch switches when the backlight is not lit or when there is no display. • Check system safety before pressing the touch switches. • Do not use the touch switches with tools such as screwdriver. • Inputs may not be recognized if the touch switches are pressed in rapid succession. Check that one input operation has finished before performing the next one. • Touch panel resistance may change over time, causing the touch points to shift. Periodically perform the calibration. Connector Pin Arrangement of COM1 5 1 9 6 Pin number Precautions for Safe Use 14 Signal name Name 1 2 NC SD Not connected. Send data 3 4 RD RS Receive data Request to send 5 6 CS 5VDC Clear to send 5VDC output (250 mA max.) 7 8 NC NC Not connected. Not connected. 9 SG Signal ground Make sure that the total current capacity of devices being supplied power is 250 mA maximum before using the 5VDC power supply from pin 6. The capacity of the PT's 5VDC output is 250 mA maximum at 5VDC ±5%. Section 2-2 Specifications Connector Pin Arrangement of COM2 10 8 6 4 S2+ S2− R2+ R2− 2 COM2 FG 9 7 Pin number 5 3 1 Signal name FG Name Functional ground 2 3 SG Signal ground Not Connected 4 5 RDA(−) Receive data Not Connected 6 7 RDB(+) Receive data Not Connected 8 9 SDA(−) Send data Not Connected 10 SDB(+) Send data 1 Slide Switch SW1 The system menu will be displayed when setting the slide switch to the left (ON) to turn ON the power. With the slide switch in the left position, user screens cannot be displayed. Therefore, the slide switch must always be in the right position (OFF). DIP Switch SW2 DIP switch ON OFF Pin No. Pin 1 Function COM2 RS422A/485 setting Pin 2 ON OFF RS-485 RS-422A COM2 RS-422A/485 setting RS-485 RS-422A Pin 3 COM2 terminating resistance setting Terminating resistance enabled Terminating resistance disabled Pin 4 Not used --- --- 15 Specifications Section 2-2 Set the RS-422A/RS-485 of the COM2 serial port and the terminating resistance. When using RS-422A, set pin 1 and 2 to OFF. When using RS-485, set pin 1 and 2 to ON. When connecting to the host using RS-422A/485, set pin 3 to ON (enable the terminating resistance) of the PT connected at the end. Also when using a 1:1 connection, set pin 3 to ON (enable the terminating resistance). 16 SECTION 3 Installing the PT and Connecting Peripheral Devices This section describes the methods used to install the PT and connect peripheral devices. 3-1 Installing the PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3-1-1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3-1-2 Mounting the PT to the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3-1-3 Connecting the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3-1-4 Wiring the Ground Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3-2 Starting the PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3-3 Connecting the NP-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3-3-1 Connecting via RS-232C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3-3-2 Connecting via USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 Connecting with a 1:1 NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3-4-1 Connection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3-4-2 Unit Setting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Connecting with 1:N NT Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3-5-1 Connection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3-5-2 Unit Setting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 High-speed 1:N NT Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3-6-1 37 Unit Setting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3-7-1 Connection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3-7-2 Unit Setting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Connecting to Temperature Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 3-8-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 3-8-2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 3-8-3 Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Using USB Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 3-9-1 60 Transferring Data with USB Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Section 3-1 Installing the PT 3-1 Installing the PT The methods used to mount the PT to the control panel and connect the power supply are described here. ! WARNING After the NP-series PT has been installed, qualified personnel must confirm the installation, and must conduct test operations and maintenance. The qualified personnel must be qualified and authorized to secure safety at each phases of design, installation, running, maintenance, and disposal of system. A qualified person in charge, who is familiar with the machine, must conduct and verify the installation of the NP-series PT. 3-1-1 Installation Environment Always mount the PT to the control panel and perform other installation procedures according to the following precautions. Precautions for Correct Use Do not install the PT in any of the following locations: • Locations subject to extreme temperature changes. • Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the ranges in the specifications. • Locations subject to high humidity that may result in condensation. • Locations that would subject the PT to chemicals. • Locations that would subject the PT to oil. • Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases. • Locations that would subject the PT to direct shock or vibration. • Locations that would directly expose the PT to wind or rain. • Locations subject to strong ultraviolet light. Provide proper shielding measures when installing in the following locations: • Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise. • Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields. • Locations near power supply lines. • Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation. Precautions for Safe Use 18 When unpacking the PT and peripheral devices, check for any external damage. Shake the product gently and check for any abnormal sounds. Section 3-1 Installing the PT 3-1-2 Mounting the PT to the Control Panel The PT is flush-mounted to the control panel. The PT is mounted using the panel mounting brackets provided with the PT, and tools, such as a Phillips screwdriver. Use the following procedure to mount the PT to the control panel. 1,2,3... 1. Make a hole in the panel for flush mounting according to the following dimensions and insert the PT from the front of the panel. Height Width Model Recommended panel thickness: 1.6 to 2.5 mm Dimensions +1 +1 NP5 Width 172.4 0 × Height 132.4 0 mm NP3 Width 118.5 0 × Height 92.5 0 mm +1 +1 2. Secure the panel mounting brackets from the back of the panel, as shown in the following diagram. Insert the catch on each bracket into the square hole on the PT, and secure the PT to the panel by tightening the screws with a Phillips screwdriver while gently pulling in the PT. Precautions for Safe Use • Always install the PT in the control panel. • Do not allow metal particles to enter the PT while work is being performed on the panel. • The allowable thickness of the panel for mounting is between 1.6 and 2.5 mm. Secure the mounting brackets with a uniform tightening torque of between 0.7 N·m to keep the PT waterproof and dustproof. The front sheet may become distorted if the tightening torque is more than the specified limit or not uniform. Always use a panel that is clean, not distorted, and strong enough to adequately withstand mounting the PT. 19 Section 3-1 Installing the PT 3-1-3 Connecting the Power Supply Connect a 24-VDC power supply to the power input terminals. Precautions for Safe Use • Do not connect an AC power supply to the DC power terminals. • Use a DC power supply with low voltage fluctuation. • Do not perform a dielectric strength test. • Use a DC power supply that will provide a stable output even if the input is momentarily interrupted for 10 ms, and which has reinforced or double insulation. ■ Power Supply The following table shows the specifications for the power supply that can be connected. Determine power supply specifications that meet the power supply capacity requirements. Item Power supply voltage 24 VDC Value Allowable voltage range Power supply capacity 21.6 to 27.6 VDC (24 VDC −10% to +15%) 12 W minimum 24 VDC Functional ground Breaker Breaker 24 VDC power supply Precautions for Safe Use • Connect power to the power connector using twisted-pair power lines with a cross-sectional area of at least 2 mm2 (AWG14). • The tightening torque of the terminal block is 0.51 N·m. 3-1-4 Wiring the Ground Wire The PT is provided with a functional ground (FG: ) terminal. Wire the FG terminal according to the following conditions. 1,2,3... 1. Ground according to Figure when there is difference in potential between the PT and host. Do not ground the functional ground (FG: ) of the PT if it is far from the host and one-point grounding is difficult. 2. Do not ground the functional ground (FG: ) of the PT if it is mounted to the same panel as devices that generate noise, such as motors and inverters. PT Host One-point grounding Precautions for Safe Use 20 Ground correctly to prevent malfunctions caused by noise. Section 3-2 Starting the PT 3-2 Starting the PT Check that the hardware is connected properly, turn ON the power to the PT, and then start the PT. Use the following procedure to start the PT. Starting the PT For the First Time 1,2,3... 1. Make sure that SW1 (slide switch) on the back is set to the right (OFF). 2. Turn ON the power to the PT. The indicator on the front will light and the PT is started. 3. The series name, date and time are shown on the display. Confirm whether the date and time are correct. 4. Set the date and time in the system menu. To start the system menu, turn OFF the power, set the slide switch SW1 to the left (ON) and then turn ON the power again. Starting the PT to Which Screen Data Were Downloaded 1,2,3... 1. Make sure that SW1 (slide switch) on the back is set to the right (OFF). 2. Turn ON the power to the PT. The indicator on the front will light and the PT is started. 3. The initial screen of the downloaded screen data is shown on the display. Starting the System Menu 1,2,3... 1. Set the SW1 (slide switch) on the back to the left (ON). 2. Turn ON the power to the PT. The indicator on the front will light and the PT is started. 3. The system menu is shown on the display. Precautions for Safe Use Confirm system safety before turning the power ON and OFF. 21 Section 3-3 Connecting the NP-Designer 3-3 Connecting the NP-Designer Use an RS-232C or USB cable to connect the PT and computer to transfer screen data created with the NP-Designer to the PT. 3-3-1 Connecting via RS-232C Connect the RS-232C cable from the computer to COM1 serial port. Communications Conditions The communications conditions are set from the PT Menu of the NPDesigner. For details, refer to 6-2-4 PT Menu. Recommended Connecting Cables The following cables are recommended when connecting via RS-232C. XW2Z-S002 (OMRON, cable length: 2 m) (D-Sub male 9-pin and D-Sub female 9-pin, for IBM PC/AT or compatible computers) For details on preparing connecting cables, refer to Appendix D Preparing Connecting Cables. 3-3-2 Connecting via USB Connect the USB port on the computer to the USB slave connector on the PT. Some preparations are required and some restrictions exist, as described below. Be sure to connect USB correctly. USB Driver for PTs 22 To transfer screens using USB communications, a USB driver for the PT must be installed in the computer. The USB driver is automatically installed when the computer is connected to the PT for the first time. Section 3-3 Connecting the NP-Designer Precautions for Safe Use • Commercially available and recommended USB Hubs do not have the same specifications as the NP-series PT. Normal operation may not be possible in environments subject to noise or static electricity. When using USB Hubs, be sure to provide sufficient measures to prevent noise and static electricity, or install in a location that is not subject to noise or static electricity. • Do not connect the USB connector to any device that is not applicable. • Before connecting the USB connector to a device, make sure that the device is free of damage. All models in the NP Series support USB communications. Use a commercially available USB cable to connect the PT to the USB port. Use a USB cable that is 5 m or shorter. 23 Section 3-4 Connecting with a 1:1 NT Link 3-4 3-4-1 Connecting with a 1:1 NT Link Connection Methods This section describes the methods for connecting the host to a serial port of the PT using RS-232C, RS-422A or RS-485 communications. The connection methods are as follows: Direct Connection to the COM 1 Serial Port Using RS-232C This is the easiest connection method. OMRON cables with connectors can be used, depending on the host being connected. PT Host RS-232C cable (15 m max.) Connection to COM2 Serial Port using RS422A/485 This connection method allows an extended communications distance of up to 500 m. Host PT RS-422A/RS-485 cable (500 m max.) Using RS-232C and RS-422A or RS-232C and RS-485 allows connecting two hosts at the same time. Any combination of devices can be connected to the PT. PT Host 1 RS-232C cable RS-422A/RS-485 cable Host 2 To use the COM2 serial port, the SW2 DIP switch on the back of the PT must be set. Pin No. ON OFF COM2 RS-422A/485 setting RS-485 RS-422A Pin 2 COM2 RS-422A/485 setting RS-485 RS-422A Pin 3 COM2 terminating resistance setting Not used Terminating resistance enabled --- Terminating resistance disabled --- Pin 4 Precautions for Safe Use Function Pin 1 • Always tighten the connector screws after connecting communications cables. The tightening torque of the serial port COM2 is 0.2 N·m. • The connector's pull load is 30 N. Do not subject the connectors to a greater load than that specified. 24 Section 3-4 Connecting with a 1:1 NT Link Supported Host Units Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have a built-in 1:1 NT Link function. Some PLCs can also be connected in a 1:1 NT Link by adding a Serial Communications Board or Communications Board. When connecting the PT to a PLC, check the series and model of the PLC and the model of the Board mounted to the PLC. Refer to Appendix E Standard Models for details on the Units that can be connected to NP-series PTs as hosts using RS-232C, RS-422A or RS-485 communications in a 1:1 NT Link. Precautions for Correct Use Connecting to CPM2C PLCs CS/CJ series CPU Units cannot be connected in a 1:1 NT Link. Use a 1:1 connection through 1:N NT Links (normal or high speed). For details, refer to 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links or 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Links. The CPM2C has a single connector that is the same shape as a CS-series peripheral port. Internally, the connector has signal lines that are for use with the CPU's built-in RS-232C port and the peripheral port. Therefore, when using the CPM2C, use the settings for the CPU's built-in RS-232C port or for the peripheral port according to the converter cable and port used. When using a CPM2C1-CIF21 Simplified Communications Unit, connect it to the RS-232C port. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual (W356) for details. Use CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable to connect the CPM2C to the NP-series PT using the built-in RS-232C port of the CPM2C. The peripheral port cannot be used to connect the PT. Port for connecting PT CS1W-CN118 port (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC Setup Set for built-in RS-232C. CS1W-CN118 CPM2C RS-232C port (D-SUB 9-pin female) When using a CPM2C1-CIF21 Simplified Communications Unit, connect it to the RS-232C port. RS-232C port 25 Section 3-4 Connecting with a 1:1 NT Link 3-4-2 Unit Setting Methods The methods for setting each Unit are as follows: Connecting C Series, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CQM1, CPM2A, CPM2C or CQM1H PLCs PLC Setup Area Write the settings directly from the Programming Device (CX-Programmer, etc.) to the PLC Setup Area (in DM Area) according to the host type and port used. Using RS-232C Note Host type Built-in RS-232C port of C200HX/HG/HE(Z), CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, or CQM1H CPM1A Address Write value Settings DM 6645 4000 Uses 1:1 NT Link DM 6650 Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.) Port 1 of CQM1H (See note 2.) DM 6555 Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.) DM 6550 (1) RS-232C port of Communications Board. (2) RS-232C port of Serial Communications Board. Using RS-422A/485 Host type Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.) Port 2 of CQM1H (See note 2.) Note Address Write value Settings DM 6555 4000 Uses 1:1 NT Link DM 6550 (1) RS-422A/485 port of Communications Board. (2) RS-422A/485 port of Serial Communications Board. Refer to the manuals of the PLC being used for details on using the PLC Setup Area. Setting the Front Panel DIP Switch Set the DIP switch on the front panel to enable the PLC Setup Area (Data Memory) settings, as follows: Using the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CQM1, or CQM1H PLCs via RS-232C C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) ON CQM1H ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 ON OFF CQM1 ON OFF RS-232C Communications Conditions Setting Set pin 5 of the DIP switch to OFF to enable the PLC Setup Area settings. 26 Section 3-4 Connecting with a 1:1 NT Link Using the CPM2A 100-240 L1 VAC L2/N COM 00 0CH 01 03 02 05 04 07 06 09 08 11 10 01 00 1CH 03 02 05 04 NC IN 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 11 ON 0CH COMM RUN ERR ON SYSMAC CPM2A PWR ALM OFF OUT 10CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 11CH 00 01 02 03 PORT 24VDC 0.3A OUTPUT EXP OFF PERIPHERAL 10CH 11CH 00 02 00 01 02 04 05 07 COM 01 03 COM COM COM 03 COM 06 Set the communications conditions setting switch to OFF (lower position). Using the CPM2C (via RS-232C only) Set the switches according to whether the peripheral port or the built-in RS-232C port is used, as follows: • Connecting the PT to the built-in RS-232C port (The peripheral port is used to connect devices that require non-standard communications settings.) SW1:OFF SW2:ON • Connecting the PT to the built-in RS-232C port (The peripheral port is used to connect the Programming Console.) SW1:OFF SW2:OFF Setting the Communications Board Switches (Using RS-422A/485) Using the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) Switch 1: 4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A), 2 (Two-wire method = RS-485) Switch 2: ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used) Using the CQM1H Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE): 4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A), 2 (Two-wire method = RS-485) Terminating resistance switch (TERM):ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used) 27 Section 3-4 Connecting with a 1:1 NT Link Serial Communications Board (Inner Board slot 1) RDY OMM1 COMM1 COMM2 OMM2 PORT1 Terminating resistance switch Set to ON (right position). TERM ON WIRE 2 4 PORT2 RS422 /485 SCB41 Connecting to CVM1/CV Series (-V) PLCs Two-wire/four-wire switch For RS-422A: Set to 4 to use four-wire (right position). For RS-485: Set to 2 to use two-wire (left position). PLC Setup When using CVM1/CV-series PLCs, always set the Execute Process (Execute Control 2) in the PLC Setup to synchronous execution. Setting the Front Panel DIP Switch Set the DIP switch as follows. When connecting to RS-485, set the switch to RS-422A. • Switch setting Set this to RS-232C or RS-422A. Communications path switch RS-232C RS-422A • Communication Type Setting (DIP switch pin 3) Set pin 3 to ON. (for NT link communication) • Terminator setting (DIP switch pin 6, RS-422A/485) Set pin 6 to ON. (Set terminator ON.) 28 Section 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links 3-5 3-5-1 Connecting with 1:N NT Links Connection Methods This section describes the methods used to connect NP-series PTs using the 1:N NT Link protocol. The COM2 serial port of the PT is used. This connection method can be used for 1:N NT Link connections (normal, high-speed). PT Host RS-422A/RS-485 cable Supported Host Units The OMRON PLCs that can be connected in 1:N NT Links are limited to the CS-series, CJ-series, CP-series, and C-series PLCs. CS-series PLCs can also be connected in 1:N NT Links by using a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit. CJ-series PLCs can also be connected in 1:N NT Links by using a CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit. Check the series and model of the PLC and the model of the Board or Unit that is mounted to the PLC when connecting the PTs to the host. For details on the Units used as hosts that can be connected in 1:N NT Links, refer to Appendix E Standard Models. To use the COM2 serial port, the SW2 DIP switch on the back of the PT must be set. Pin No. Function Pin 1 COM2 RS-422A/485 setting Pin 2 COM2 RS-422A/485 setting Pin 3 COM2 terminating resistance setting Pin 4 Not used ON RS-485 OFF RS-422A RS-485 RS-422A Terminating resistance enabled Terminating resistance disabled --- --- Reference CS-series PLCs with -V1 suffix support high-speed 1:N NT Links as well as normal 1:N NT Links. CS-series PLCs without the -V1 suffix can also be connected to high-speed 1:N NT Links if the latest Serial Communications Board/ Unit is used. Refer to 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Links for details. 29 Section 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links 3-5-2 Unit Setting Methods The methods for setting each unit are as follows: Connecting to CP-series PLCs CP1L-@-@ and CP1H-@-@ PLC Setup Area Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (CX-Programmer, etc.) to the PLC Setup Area according to the host type and port used. Host type Address CP1L-M 144 CP1H 145 150 CP1L-L Note Write value Settings 8200 Uses 1:N NT Link 0000 000@ Baud rate (normal) 38400bps @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of connected PTs. (See note.) 160 161 8200 0000 Uses 1:N NT Link Baud rate (normal) 38400bps 166 000@ @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of connected PTs. (See note.) When connecting a PROCOM, always set the value for @ to 0. Setting the Front Panel Switches Set the DIP switch on the front panel to enable the PLC Setup Area settings, as follows: 1 NO When using the serial port 1, set SW4 to OFF. When using the serial port 2, set SW5 to OFF. CP1L-L has only one serial port. Therefore there is no DIP switch SW5. 1 2 3 3 4 5 4 6 Connecting to C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), and CQM1H PLCs NO 2 CP1L-M CP1H CP1L-L PLC Setup Area Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (CX-Programmer, etc.) to the PLC Setup Area (Data Memory) according to the host type and port used. Using RS-232C Host type Built-in RS-232C port of C200HX/ HG/HE(-Z) Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.) Port 1 of CQM1H (See note 2.) Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.) Note Address Write value Settings DM 6645 5@00 Uses 1:N NT Link @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of connected DM 6555 PTs. (See note 3.) DM 6550 (1) RS-232C port of Communications Board. (2) RS-232C port of Serial Communications Board. (3) The PT unit numbers for the C200HE (-Z) are 0 to 3. 30 Section 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links Using RS-422A/485 Host type Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.) Port 2 of CQM1H (See note 2.) Note Address Write value Settings DM 6555 5@00 Uses 1:N NT Link @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of the conDM 6550 5@00 nected PTs. (See note 3.) (1) RS-422A/485 port of Communications Board. (2) RS-422A/485 port of Serial Communications Board. (3) The PT unit numbers for the C200HE (-Z) are 0 to 3. Refer to the manuals of the PLC being used for details on using the PLC Setup Area. • There is no Communications Board for use with C200HX/HG/HE (-Z) where port B is an RS-422A/485 port. Precautions for Correct Use • There is no Communications Board for use with CQM1H where Port 1 is an RS-422A/485 port. • When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps. Setting the Front Panel DIP Switch (Using RS-232C) When using C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), set the DIP switch on the front panel to enable the PLC Setup Area (Data Memory) settings, as follows: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Sets the RS-232C port communications conditions. Set DIP switch pin 5 to OFF to enable the PLC Setup settings. ON OFF ON Setting the Communications Board Switches (Using RS-422A/485) Using C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) Switch 1: 4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A) 2 (Two-wire method = RS-485) Switch 2: ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used) Using CQM1H Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE): 4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A) 2 (Two-wire method = RS-485) Terminating resistance switch (TERM):ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used) 31 Section 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links Serial Communications Board (Inner Board slot 1) RDY OMM1 COMM1 COMM2 OMM2 PORT1 Terminating resistance switch Set to ON (right position). TERM ON WIRE 2 4 Two-wire/four-wire switch For RS-422A: Set to 4 to use four-wire (right position). For RS-485: Set to 2 to use two-wire (left position). PORT2 RS422 /485 SCB41 Connecting to CS-series CPU Units CS1G/H-CPU@@-E(V1) and CS1G/H-CPU@@H PLC Setup Area Using RS-232C When connecting the PT to a CS-series CPU Unit, set the communications conditions in the PLC Setup according to the communications port used, as follows: Using Built-in RS-232C Port of CS1G/H or CS1G/H-H Address 160 161 166 Note Write value 8200 0000 to 0009 (See note 1.) 000@ Settings 1:N NT Link Mode Baud rate (normal) @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of the connected PTs. (1) Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.) For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 0, and 2 to 5 to the built-in RS232C port in 1:N NT Links, set address 160 to 8200 Hex, and address 166 to 0005 Hex. Set whether the PLC Setup is set directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or created using the Support Software (CX-Programmer) and transferred to the CPU Unit. Refer to the SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual (W339) for information on PLC Setup. Precautions for Correct Use When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps. Setting the Front Panel Switches Using RS-232C Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected, as follows: 32 Section 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links DIP switch (inside battery compartment) • Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the PT to the peripheral port (to use the communications settings in the PLC Setup). • Turn OFF pin 5 when connecting the PT to the RS-232C port (to use the communications settings in the PLC Setup). Peripheral port Mainly connected to a programming device. (Can be connected to an RS-232C device.) RS-232C port Mainly connected to an RS-232C device. (Can be connected to a computer running the CX-Programmer.) Connecting to CJ-series CPU Units CJ1G-CPU@@ PLC Setup Area Using RS-232C When connecting the PT to a CJ-series CPU Unit, set the communications conditions in the PLC Setup according to the communications port used, as follows: Using the CJ1G/H-H, CJ1G, or CJ1M Built-in RS-232C Port Address Write value Settings 160 161 8200 0000 to 0009 (See note 1.) 1:N NT Link Mode Baud rate (normal) 166 00@ @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of the connected PTs. Note (1) Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.) For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 0, and 2 to 5 to the built-in RS232C port in 1:N NT Links, set address 160 to 8200 Hex, and address 166 to 0005 Hex. Set whether the PLC Setup is set directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or created by the Support Software (CX-Programmer) and transferred to the CPU Unit. Refer to the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual (W393) for information on the PLC Setup. Precautions for Correct Use When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps. Setting the Front Panel Switches Using RS-232C Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected, as follows: 33 Section 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links DIP switch (inside battery compartment) Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the PT to the peripheral port (to use the communications settings in the PLC Setup). Turn OFF pin 5 when connecting the PT to the RS-232C port (to use the communications settings in the PLC Setup). Peripheral port Connected to a Programming Console or other device. RS-232C port Connected to device other than Programming Console. Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Boards Serial Communications Boards with RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Ports for Use with CS-series CPU Units: CS1W-SCB21 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-232C ports.) CS1W-SCB41 (Port 1 is an RS-232C port and Port 2 is an RS-422A/485 port.) Setting DM Area Allocations in CPU Unit Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (Programming Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction. The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings. The allocations and settings are the same for RS-232C and RS-422A/485 (CS1W-SCB41 Port 2). Allocated DM Area words Port 1 DM32000 Port 2 DM32010 DM32001 DM32011 DM32006 DM32016 Note Write value Settings 8200 1:N NT Link Mode 0000 to 0009 (See note 1.) 000@ Baud rate (normal) @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of the connected PTs. (1) Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.) For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 3 to 6 to Port 1 in 1:N NT Links, set DM32000 to 8200 Hex, DM32001 to 0000 Hex, and DM32006 to 0006 Hex. Precautions for Correct Use 34 When setting a 1:N NT Links in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps Section 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links Setting the Front Panel Switches Using RS-422A/485 RDY COMM1 COMM2 Port 1 RS-232C PORT1 OFF ONTERM 2 4 WIRE Port 2 RS-422A/485 Terminating resistance switch (TERM) Set to ON: Terminating resistance used (right position) Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE) For RS-422A: Set to 4 for four-wire (right position). For RS-485: Set to 2 for two-wire (left position). PORT2 (RS422/ RS485) SCB41 Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Units CS1W-SCU21 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-232C ports.) CPU Unit DM Area Settings Using RS-232C Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (Programming Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction. The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings. m = 30000 + 100 × unit number Allocated DM Area words Port 1 Port 2 DM m DM m+1 DM m+10 DM m+11 DM m+6 DM m+16 Note Write value 8200 0000 to 0009 (See note 1.) 000@ Settings 1:N NT Link Mode Baud rate (normal) @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of the connected PTs. (1) Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.) Precautions for Correct Use When setting a 1:N NT Links in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps. Setting the Front Panel Switches Using RS-232C Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit with the rotary switches on the front of the Unit. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to set the numerals and symbols in the switches setting display window, as follows: 35 Section 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links SCU21 RDY ERH SD2 RD2 RUN ERC SD1 RD1 6543 A987 Connecting to CJ-series Serial Communications Units • Unit number setting 2F EDCB UNIT No. Set a value between 0 and F that is not the same as that of other Units. CJ1W-SCU41 (Port 1 is an RS-422A/485 port and Port 2 is an RS-232C port.) CPU Unit DM Area Settings Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (Programming Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction. The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings. The allocations and settings are the same for RS-232C, RS-422A and RS485. m = 30000 + 100 × unit number Allocated DM Area words Write value Settings Port 1 DM m Port 2 DM m+10 8200 1:N NT Link Mode DM m+1 DM m+11 0000 to 0009 (See note 1.) Baud rate (normal) DM m+6 DM m+16 000@ @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of the connected PTs. Note (1) Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.) When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps. Precautions for Correct Use Setting the Front Panel Switches CJ1W-SCU41 SCU41 SD1 RD1 TER1 ERH SD2 RD2 ON WIRE 2 4 345 8 67 9 TERM OFF ABCD RDY E012 RUN ERC Display indicators UNIT NO. PORT1 (RS422 /485) Terminating resistance switch (TERM) Unit number setting switch Set a value between 0 and F that is not the same as these used by other Units in the system. Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE) For RS-422A: Set to 4 for four-wire operation (right position). For RS-485: Set to 2 for two-wire operation (left position). PORT2 Port 1 RS-422A/485 Port 2 RS-232C 36 Section 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Links 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Links Supported Host Units The OMRON PLCs that can be connected to high-speed 1:N NT Links using RS-232C are as follows: • CS-series PLCs: CS1G/H-V1 and CS1G/H-H • CJ-series PLCs: CJ1G, CJ1G/H-H, and CJ1M • CP-series PLCs: CP1L and CP1H CS-series PLCs can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links by using a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit or CS1W-SCB21/41 Serial Communications Board. (CS-series PLCs without a -V1 suffix can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links if a Serial Communications Unit is used.) CJ-series PLCs can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links by using a CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit. The OMRON PLCs that can be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links using RS-422A/485 are as follows: • CS-series PLCs: CS1G/H and CS1G/H-H • CJ-series PLCs: CJ1G/H-H, CJ1G, and CJ1M CS-series PLCs can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links by using a CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board. (CS-series PLCs without -V1 suffix can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links if a Serial Communications Board is used.) CJ-series PLCs can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links by using a CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit. Check the series and model of the PLC and the model of the Board or Unit that are mounted to the PLC when connecting the PT to the host. For details on the PLCs that can be connected, refer to Appendix E Standard Models. To use the COM2 serial port, the SW2 DIP switch on the back of the PT must be set. Pin No. ON OFF Pin 1 COM2 RS-422A/485 setting RS-485 RS-422A Pin 2 COM2 RS-422A/485 setting COM2 terminating resistance setting Not used RS-485 RS-422A Terminating resistance enabled --- Terminating resistance disabled --- Pin 3 Pin 4 3-6-1 Function Unit Setting Methods The methods for setting each Unit are as follows: Connecting to CP-series PLCs CP1L-@-@ and CP1H-@-@ PLC Setup Area Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (CX-Programmer, etc.) to the PLC Setup Area according to the host type and port used. Host type Address Write value CP1L-M CP1H 144 145 8200 000A Uses 1:N NT Link Baud rate (high-speed) 115,200bps Settings 150 000@ @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of connected PTs. (See note.) 37 Section 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Links Host type Address Write value Settings CP1L-L 160 8200 Uses 1:N NT Link 161 166 Note 000A 000@ Baud rate (high-speed) 115,200bps @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of connected PTs. (See note.) When connecting a PROCOM, always set the value for @ to 0. Setting the Front Panel Switches Set the DIP switch on the front panel to enable the PLC Setup Area settings, as follows: 1 NO When using the serial port 1, set SW4 to OFF. When using the serial port 2, set SW5 to OFF. CP1L-L has only one serial port. Therefore there is no DIP switch SW5. 1 2 3 3 4 5 4 6 Connecting to CS-series CPU Units NO 2 CP1L-L CP1L-M CP1H CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1/CS1G/H-CPU@@H PLC Setup Area Using RS-232C When connecting the PT to a CS-series CPU Unit, set the communications conditions in the PLC Setup according to the communications port used, as follows: Using Built-in RS-232C Port of CS1G/H or CS1G/H-H Address Write value Settings 160 161 8200 000A 1:N NT Link Mode Baud rate (high-speed) 166 000@ @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of the connected PTs. For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 0, and 2 to 5 to the built-in RS232C port in high-speed 1:N NT Links, set address 160 to 8200 Hex, address 161 to 000A Hex, and address 166 to 0005 Hex. Set whether the PLC Setup is set directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or created by the Support Software (CX-Programmer) and transferred to the CPU Unit. Refer to the SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual (W339) for information on the PLC Setup. Precautions for Correct Use 38 To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 115,200 bps. Section 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Links Setting the Front Panel Switches Using RS-232C Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected, as follows: DIP switch (inside battery compartment) • Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the PT to the peripheral port (to use the communications settings in the PLC Setup). • Turn OFF pin 5 when connecting the PT to the RS-232C port (to use the communications settings in the PLC Setup). Peripheral port Mainly connected to a programming device. (Can be connected to an RS-232C device.) RS-232C port Mainly connected to an RS-232C device. (Can be connected to a computer running the CX-Programmer.) Connecting to CJ-series CPU Units CJ1G-CPU@@/CJ1G/H-CPU@@-H/CJ1M-CPU@@ PLC Setup Area Using RS-232C When connecting the PT to a CJ-series CPU Unit, set the communications conditions in the PLC Setup according to the communications port used, as follows: Using the CJ1G/H-H, CJ1G, or CJ1M, Built-in RS-232C Port Address Write value 160 8200 1:N NT Link Mode 161 166 Baud rate (high-speed) @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of the connected PTs. 000A 000@ Settings For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 0, and 2 to 5 to the built-in RS232C port in 1:N NT Links, set address 160 to 8200 Hex and address 166 to 0005 Hex. Set whether the PLC Setup is to be set directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or created by the Support Software (CX-Programmer) and transferred to the CPU Unit. Refer to the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual (W393) for information on the PLC Setup. Precautions for Correct Use To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 115,200 bps. Setting the Front Panel Switches Using RS-232C Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected, as follows: 39 Section 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Links DIP switch (inside battery compartment) Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the PT to the peripheral port (to use the communications settings in the PLC Setup). Turn OFF pin 5 when connecting the PT to the RS-232C port (to use the communications settings in the PLC Setup). Peripheral port Connected to a Programming Console or other device. RS-232C port Connected to device other than Programming Console. Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Boards Serial Communications Boards with RS-232C Port for Use with CS-series CPU Units: CS1W-SCB21 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-232C ports.) CS1W-SCB41 (Port 1 is an RS-232C port and Port 2 is an RS-422A/485 port.) Precautions for Correct Use High-speed 1:N NT Links can be used with Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units from lot numbers 991220 (December 20, 1999) or later. Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used, so confirm that the lot number is supported. CPU Unit DM Area Settings Write the settings directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or Support Software (CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction. The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings. The settings are the same for RS-232C and RS-422A/485 (CS1W-SCB41 Port 2). Allocated DM Area words Port 1 Port 2 Write value Settings DM3200 DM32001 DM32010 DM32011 8200 000A 1:N NT Link Mode Baud rate (high-speed) DM32006 DM32016 000@ @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of the connected PTs. For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 3 to 6 to Port 1 in 1:N NT Links, set DM32000 to 8200 Hex, DM32001 to 000A Hex, and DM32006 to 0006 Hex. Precautions for Correct Use 40 To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 115,200 bps. Section 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Links Setting the Front Panel Switches Using RS-422A/485 RDY COMM1 COMM2 Port 1 RS-232C PORT1 OFF ONTERM 2 4 WIRE Port 2 RS-422A/485 Terminating resistance switch (TERM) Set to ON: Terminating resistance used (right position) Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE) For RS-422A: Set to 4 for four-wire (right position). For RS-485: Set to 2 for two-wire (left position). PORT2 (RS422/ RS485) SCB41 Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Units CS-series Rack-mounted Type: CS1W-SCU21 Precautions for Correct Use High-speed 1:N NT Links can be used with Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units from lot numbers 991220 (December 20, 1999) or later. Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used, so confirm that the lot number is supported. CPU Unit DM Area Settings Write the settings directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or Support Software (CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction. The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings. Using RS-232C m = 30000 + 100 × unit number Allocated DM Area words Write value Settings Port 1 DM m Port 2 DM m+10 8200 1:N NT Link Mode DM m+1 DM m+6 DM m+11 DM m+16 000A 000@ Baud rate (high-speed) @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of the connected PTs. Precautions for Correct Use To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 115,200 bps. Setting the Front Panel Switches Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit with the rotary switches on the front of the Unit. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to set the numerals and symbols of the switch's setting display window, as follows: 41 Section 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Links SCU21 RDY ERH SD2 RD2 RUN ERC SD1 RD1 6543 A987 Connecting to CJ-series Serial Communications Units • Unit number setting 2F EDCB UNIT No. Set a value between 0 and F that is not the same as that of other Units. CJ1W-SCU41 (Port 1 is an RS-422A/485 port and Port 2 is an RS-232C port.) CPU Unit DM Area Settings Write the settings directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction. The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings. The allocations and settings are the same for RS-232C, RS-422A and RS485. m = 30000 + 100 × unit number Allocated DM Area words Write value Settings Port 1 DM m Port 2 DM m+10 8200 1:N NT Link Mode DM m+1 DM m+6 DM m+11 DM m+16 000A 000@ Baud rate (high-speed) @: Largest unit number (0 to 7) of the connected PTs. To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 115,200 bps. Precautions for Correct Use Setting the Front Panel Switches CJ1W-SCU41 SCU41 SD1 RD1 TER1 ERH SD2 RD2 ON WIRE 2 4 345 8 67 9 TERM OFF ABCD RDY E012 RUN ERC Display indicators UNIT NO. PORT1 (RS422 /485) Terminating resistance switch (TERM) Unit number setting switch Set a value between 0 and F that is not the same as these used by other Units in the system. Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE) For RS-422A: Set to 4 for four-wire operation (right position). For RS-485: Set to 2 for two-wire operation (left position). PORT2 Port 1 RS-422A/485 Port 2 RS-232C 42 Section 3-7 Host Link 3-7 3-7-1 Host Link Connection Methods Host Link is a method used to connect a single PT to a single host in a 1:1 connection in the same way as 1:1 NT Link using RS-232C or RS-422A communications. Connecting to a COM1 Serial Port Using RS-232C This is the easiest connection method. OMRON cables with connectors can be used, depending on the host being connected. PT Host RS-232C cable (15 m max.) Connecting to a COM2 Serial Port Using RS-422A This connection method allows an extended communications distance of up to 500 m. Host PT RS-422A/RS-485 cable (500 m max.) The two hosts can be connected at the same time by using RS-232C and RS422A. Any combination of devices can be connected to the PT. PT Host 1 RS-232C cable RS-422A/RS-485 cable Host 2 To use the COM2 serial port, the SW2 DIP switch on the back of the PT must be set. Pin No. Function Pin 1 COM2 RS-422A/485 setting Pin 2 COM2 RS-422A/485 setting Precautions for Safe Use RS-485 ON OFF RS-422A RS-485 RS-422A Pin 3 COM2 terminating resistance setting Terminating resistance enabled Terminating resistance disabled Pin 4 Not used --- --- • Always tighten the connector screws after connecting communications cables. • The connector's pull load is 30 N. Do not subject the connectors to a greater load than that specified. 43 Section 3-7 Host Link Supported Host Units Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have a built-in Host Link function. Some PLCs can also be connected in a Host Link by adding a Serial Communications Board or Communications Board. When connecting the PT to a PLC, check the series and model of the PLC and the model of the Board mounted to the PLC. Refer to Appendix E Standard Models for details on the Units that can be connected to NP-series PTs as hosts using RS-232C or RS-422A communications in a Host Link. Communication Settings This table shows the communication settings required at the PT and host to connect to the host by means of Host Link communications. Item Setting Data Bits Stop Bits 7 bits 2 bits Parity Baud rate Even Any value. Note that values set for the PT and host must be the same. 0 Host Unit No. Use the PT Menu from NP-Designer to make these setting of the PT. Please refer to the 6-2-4 PT Menu for details. For communication settings of the host, refer to the relevant manual for each PLC. 3-7-2 Unit Setting Methods The methods for setting each Unit are as follows: Connecting to CP-series PLCs CP1L-@-@ and CP1H-@-@ PLC Setup Area Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (CX-Programmer, etc.) to the PLC Setup Area according to the host type and port used. Host type Address Write value CP1L-M 144 8000 CP1H 145 0000 to 000A (See note.) CP1L-L Baud rate 150 160 0000 8000 Unit No. 00 Uses host link 161 0000 to 000A (See note.) 0000 Baud rate 166 Note Settings Uses host link Unit No. 00 Set the baud rate to the same value as for the PT unit. Setting the Front Panel Switches Set the DIP switch on the front panel to enable the PLC Setup Area settings, as follows: When using the serial port 1, set SW4 to OFF. When using the serial port 2, set SW5 to OFF. CP1L-L has only one serial port. Therefore there is no DIP switch SW5. 44 Section 3-7 1 NO Host Link 1 2 3 3 4 5 4 6 Connecting C-series CPU Unit NO 2 CP1L-L CP1L-M CP1H C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H CPU Unit and SRM1 Connecting C-series CPU Unit PLC model RS-232C method RS-422A method CQM1 • Connect to the CPU Unit's builtin RS-232C port. --- C200HX/HG/ HE (-Z) • Connect to the CPU Unit's builtin RS-232C port. • Connect to one of the RS-232C ports (port A or port B) on a Communications Board. • Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01 RS232C Adapter. • Connect to the CPU Unit's builtin RS-232C port. • Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01 RS232C Adapter. • Connect to the RS-422A port (port A) on a Communications Board. CPM1A CPM2A, SRM1 • Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF11 RS422A Adapter. • Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF11 RS422A Adapter. CPM2C • Connect to the CPU Unit's RS• Connect to the peripheral port 232C port or the peripheral port (on a CPM2C-CN111 or through a Connecting Cable CS1W-CN114 Connecting (CPM2C-CN111, CS1W-CN118, Cable) through a CPM1-CIF11 or CS1W-CN114). RS-422A Adapter. (The CPM2C-CN111 splits the (The CPM2C-CN111 splits the Unit's communications port into Unit's communications port into an RS-232C port and a peripha RS-232C port and a peripheral port. A CPM1-CIF01 RSeral port.) 232C Adapter is also required to connect to this peripheral port.) CQM1H • Connect to the CPU Unit's built- • Connect to the RS-422A port (port 2) on a Serial Communiin RS-232C port. cations Board. • Connect to the peripheral port through a CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable. • Connect to the RS-232C port (port 1) on a Serial Communications Board. PLC Setup Area Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (CX-Programmer, etc.) to the PLC Setup Area (Data Memory) according to the host type and port used. 45 Section 3-7 Host Link Using RS-232C Host type Built-in RS-232C port of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H and SRM1 CPM1A Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.) Port 1 of CQM1H (See note 2.) Address Write value DM6645 0001 Settings Uses Host Link DM6646 03@@ (See note 3.) Standard (See note 4.) DM6648 DM6650 0000 0001 Unit No.00 Uses Host Link DM6651 03@@ (See note 3.) Standard (See note 4.) DM6653 DM6555 0000 0001 Unit No.00 Uses Host Link DM6556 03@@ (See note 3.) 0000 Standard (See note 4.) DM6558 Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.) DM6550 DM6551 DM6553 Note 0001 03@@ (See note 3.) 0000 Unit No.00 Uses Host Link Standard (See note 4.) Unit No.00 (1) RS-232C port of Communications Board. (2) RS-232C port of Serial Communications Board. (3) @@ is the setting value of communication speed. Set the same value as for the PT unit. (4) “Standard” in the communication settings refers to the following settings. Start bit: 1 bit, Data bit: 7bits, Stop bit: 2 bits, Parity: Even Using RS-422A Host type Note Address Write value Settings Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.) DM6555 DM6556 0001 03@@ (*3) Uses Host Link Standard (See note 4.) Port 2 of CQM1H (See note 2.) DM6558 DM6650 0000 0001 Unit No.00 Uses Host Link DM6651 DM6653 03@@ (*3) 0000 Standard (See note 4.) Unit No.00 (1) RS-422A port of Communications Board. (2) RS-422A port of Serial Communications Board. (3) @@ is the setting value of communication speed. Set the same value as for the PT unit. (4) “Standard” in the communication settings refers to the following settings. Start bit: 1 bit, Data bit: 7bits, Stop bit: 2 bits, Parity: Even Refer to the manuals of the PLC being used for details on using the PLC Setup Area. Connecting to CPM2C PLCs The CPM2C has a single connector that is the same shape as a CS-series peripheral port. Internally, the connector has signal lines that are for use with the CPU's built-in RS-232C port and the peripheral port. Therefore, when using the CPM2C, use the settings for the CPU's built-in RS-232C port or for the peripheral port according to the converter cable and port used. When using a CPM2C-CIF21 Simplified Communications Unit, connect it to the RS232C port. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual (W356) for details. 46 Section 3-7 Host Link Use CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable to connect the CPM2C to the NP-series PT using the built-in RS-232C port of the CPM2C. The peripheral port cannot be used to connect the PT. Port for connecting PT CS1W-CN118 port (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC Setup Set for built-in RS-232C. CS1W-CN118 CPM2C RS-232C port (D-SUB 9-pin female) When using a CPM2C1-CIF21 Simplified Communications Unit, connect it to the RS-232C port. RS-232C port Setting the Front Panel Switches Set the switch on the front panel to enable the PLC Setup Area settings, as follows: Setting the Switches on RS-232C of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CQM1 and CQM1H C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) ON CQM1H ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 ON OFF CQM1 ON OFF RS-232C Communications Conditions Setting Set pin 5 of the DIP switch to OFF to enable the PLC Setup Area settings. 47 Section 3-7 Host Link Setting the Switches of CPM2A L2/N COM 100-240 L1 VAC 01 00 0CH 03 02 05 04 07 06 09 11 08 10 01 00 1CH 03 02 05 04 NC IN 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 11 ON 0CH COMM RUN ERR ON SYSMAC CPM2A PWR ALM OFF OUT 10CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 11CH 00 01 02 03 PORT 24VDC 0.3A OUTPUT EXP OFF PERIPHERAL 10CH 11CH 00 02 00 01 02 04 05 07 COM 01 03 COM COM COM 03 COM 06 Set the communications conditions setting switch to OFF (lower position). Setting the Switches of CPM2C (Only RS-232C can be connected) Set the switches according to whether the peripheral port or the built-in RS-232C port is used, as follows: • Connecting the PT to the built-in RS-232C port (The peripheral port is used to connect devices that require non-standard communications settings.) SW1:OFF SW2:ON • Connecting the PT to the built-in RS-232C port (The peripheral port is used to connect the Programming Console.) SW1:OFF SW2:OFF Setting the Communications Board Switches (Using RS-422A) C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) Switch 1: 4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A) Switch 2: ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used) CQM1H Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE): 4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A) Terminating resistance switch (TERM):ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used) Serial Communications Board (Inner Board slot 1) RDY OMM1 COMM1 COMM2 OMM2 PORT1 Terminating resistance switch Set to ON (right position). TERM ON WIRE 2 4 PORT2 RS422 /485 SCB41 48 Two-wire/four-wire switch For RS-422A: Set to 4 to use four-wire (right position). For RS-485: Set to 2 to use two-wire (left position). Section 3-7 Host Link Setting the Switches on a Communication Adapter Using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter Set the mode switch to Host (upper position). Using a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422 Adapter Set the terminator selector switch to ON (upper position). Connecting to CVM1/CV Series (-V@) CPU Units CV500-CPU01-V1/CV1000-CPU01-V1/CV2000-CPU01-V1 CVM1-CPU01-V2/CVM1-CPU11-V2/CVM1-CPU21-V2 PLC Setup Set the communication conditions in the Host Link setting of the PLC Setup, as follows. Item Baud rate Setting Same as the value of the PT Stop Bits Parity 2 bits Even Data Bits Unit No. 7 bits 00 Set whether the PLC Setup is set directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or created by the Support Software (CX-Programmer) and transferred to the CPU Unit. For details on the PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/ CV2000 Programming Manual: Ladder Diagrams (W202-E1-@). Setting the Front Panel DIP Switch Set the switch as follows. • Switch setting Set this to RS-232C or RS-422A. Communications path switch RS-232C RS-422A • Communication Type Setting (DIP switch pin 3) Set pin 3 to OFF. (for host link communication) • Terminator setting (DIP switch pin 6,RS-422A) Set pin 6 to ON. (Set terminator ON.) 49 Section 3-7 Host Link Connecting to CS-Series CPU Units CS1G/H-CPU@@(-V) and CS1G/H-CPU@@H Connection Method Connect to the built-in RS-232C port of the CPU Unit, or the RS-232C port of the Communications Board. Note that the connection to a peripheral port must be made via an RS-232C adapter (CS1W-CN118) specially designed for connecting to a peripheral port. PLC Setup Area When connecting to a CS-series CPU Unit, set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup area according to the communication port used. Connection Method Uses built-in RS-232C port of CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H Address Write Value 160 8000 Setting Uses Host Link 161 Baud rate 163 Uses built-in peripheral port of CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H 144 145 147 Note 0000 to 000A (See note 1.) 0000 8000 0000 to 000A (See note 1.) 0000 Unit No. 00 Uses Host Link Baud rate Unit No. 00 (1) Set the same baud rate as for the PT. Set whether the PLC Setup is set directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or created by the Support Software (CX-Programmer) and transferred to the CPU Unit. Refer to the SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual (W339) for information on the PLC. Setting the Front Panel Switches Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected, as follows: DIP switch (inside battery compartment) • Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the PT to the peripheral port (to use the communications settings in the PLC Setup). • Turn OFF pin 5 when connecting the PT to the RS-232C port (to use the communications settings in the PLC Setup). Peripheral port Mainly connected to a programming device. (Can be connected to an RS-232C device.) RS-232C port Mainly connected to an RS-232C device. (Can be connected to a computer running the CX-Programmer.) Connecting to CJ-series CPU Units CJ1G-CPU@@ Connection Method Connect to the built-in RS-232C port of the CPU Unit, or the RS-232C port of the Communications Board. Note that the connection to a peripheral port must be made via an RS-232C adapter (CS1W-CN118) specially designed for connecting to a peripheral port. 50 Section 3-7 Host Link PLC Setup When connecting to a CJ-series CPU Unit, set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup area according to the communication unit used. Connection Method Uses built-in RS-232C port of CJ1G-CPU@@ Address Write Value 160 8000 Setting Uses Host Link 161 Baud rate 163 Uses peripheral port of CJ1GCPU@@ 144 145 147 Note 0000 to 000A (See note 1.) 0000 8000 0000 to 000A (See note 1.) 0000 Unit No. 00 Uses Host Link Baud rate Unit No. 00 (1) Set the same baud rate as for the PT. Set whether the PLC Setup is set directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or created using the Support Software (CX-Programmer) and transferred to the CPU Unit. Refer to the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual (W393) for information on PLC Setup. Setting the Front Panel Switches Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected, as follows: DIP switch (inside battery compartment) Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the PT to the peripheral port (to use the communications settings in the PLC Setup). Turn OFF pin 5 when connecting the PT to the RS-232C port (to use the communications settings in the PLC Setup). Peripheral port Connected to a Programming Console or other device. RS-232C port Connected to device other than Programming Console. Connecting to a C Series Host Link Unit C200H/C200HE(-Z)E/C200HG(-Z)E/C200HX(-Z)E Rack-mounted Type: C200H- LK201/LK202-V1 C1000H/C2000H Rack-mounted Type: C500-LK201-EV1 1000H(F)/C2000H Rack-mounted Type: C500-LK203 C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU-mounted Type: C120- LK201/LK202-EV1 Setting the Switches - C200H-LK201-V1 (RS-232C) Setting the Front Switches Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following. 51 Section 3-7 Host Link • Unit # (SW1, SW2) Set these switches to 0. • Command level, parity, and transfer code (SW4) Set this switch to 2. • Communications speed (SW3) Set this switch to 4 to select 4,800 bps. Set this switch to 5 to select 9,600 bps. Set this switch to 6 to select 19,200 bps. Setting the Rear Switches • 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP switch) Set #3 to ON. • CTS selection (selection switch) Set this always to 0 V (ON). - C200H-LK202-V1 (RS-422A) Setting the Front Switches Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following. • Unit # (SW1, SW2) Set these switches to 0. • Command level, parity, and transfer code (SW4) Set this switch to 2. • Communications speed (SW3) Set this switch to 4 to select 4,800 bps. Set this switch to 5 to select 9,600 bps. Set this switch to 6 to select 19,200 bps. Setting the Rear Switches • Terminator setting (selector switch) Set this switch to ON (upper position). • 1-to-1/1-to-N protocol selection (selector switch) Set this switch to 1-to-N (OFF) (lower position). 52 Section 3-7 Host Link - C500-LK201-EV1 Setting the Front Switches • Mode selector (key switch) Set this to Host link. Setting the Rear Switches • I/O port selection (selector switch) Switch this to RS-232C (lower) or RS-422 (upper). Set this to RS-422 to connect to RS485. • Unit # (DIP SW1) Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0). • Synchronization (selector switch) Set this to Internal (upper). • Terminator setting (selector switch) Set this switch to ON (lower). • Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-1 to SW2-4) Set these switches to 0010 to select 19,200 bps. Set these switches to 1010 to select 9,600 bps. Set these switches to 0110 to select 4,800 bps. (0:OFF 1:ON) • 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6) Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N). • Command level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8) Set these switches to ON (1). (Levels 1, 2 and 3 are enabled.) • CTS selection (selector switch) Set this always to 0 V (ON) (upper). 53 Section 3-7 Host Link - C500-LK203 Setting the Rear Switches • I/O port selection (selector switch) Switch this to RS-232C (lower) or RS-422 (upper). Set this to RS-422 to connect to RS485. • Unit #, parity, and transfer code (DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7) Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to OFF • Synchronization (selector switch) Set this to Internal (upper). • Terminator setting (selector switch) Set this switch to ON (lower). • Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4) Set these switches to 0010 to select 19,200 bps. Set these switches to 1010 to select 9,600 bps. Set these switches to 0110 to select 4,800 bps. (0: OFF 1: ON) • 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6) Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N). • Command level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8) Set these switches to ON (1). (Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.) • CTS selection (selector switch) Set this always to 0 V (ON) (upper). 54 Section 3-7 Host Link - C120- LK201-V1 Setting the Rear Switches • Unit #, parity, and transfer code (DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5) Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0). * Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits. • Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4) Set these switches to 0010 to select 19,200 bps. Set these switches to 1010 to select 9,600 bps. Set these switches to 1110 to select 4,800 bps. (0: OFF 1: ON) • 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6) Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N). • Command level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8) Set these switches to ON (1). (Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.) • CTS selection (DIP SW3-1 and SW3-2) Set SW3-1 to ON (1), and SW3-2 to OFF (0). (Set this always to 0V.) • Synchronization (DIP SW3-3 to SW3-6) Set SW3-3 and SW3-5 to ON (1), and SW3-4 and SW3-6 to OFF (0). (Set these to Internal.) - C120- LK202-V1 Setting the Rear Switches • Unit #, parity, and transfer code (DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5) Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0). * Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits. • Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4) Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps. Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps. Set these switches to 0110 to select 4,800 bps. (0: OFF 1: ON) • 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6) Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N). • Command level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8) Set these switches to ON (1). (Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.) • Terminator setting (DIP SW3-3 to SW3-6) Set SW3-1, SW3-3 and SW3-5 to ON (1), and SW3-2, SW3-4 and SW3-6 to OFF (0). (Set these to on.) 55 Section 3-7 Host Link Connecting to CVM1/CV Series Host Link Units CVM1/CV-series Rack-mounted type: CV500-LK201 Connection Method A CVM1/CV series host link unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (communications ports 1 and 2). • Communications port 1 Communications port 1 is a 25-pin connector for RS-232C use only. • Communications port 2 Communications port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the RS-232C or RS-422A method. To make the selection, use the Communications path switch on the front panel. Setting the Front Panel Switches • Unit # (SW3, SW4) When using communication port 2, set these switches to 0. • Communications path switch (selector switch) Switch this to RS-232C (lower) or RS-422 (upper). Set this to RS-422 to connect to RS485. • CTS selection (DIP Switch pin 2 and 3) Set pin 2 or 3 to ON. (Set this always to 0V.) To use communication port 1, set pin 2. To use communication port 2, set pin 3. • Communication condition setting (DIP switch pin 1) Set this switch to OFF. Communication is executed in accordance with the CPU bus unit system settings made at the PLC. The initial values for the system settings are as follows. • Communications speed: 9600 bps • Parity: Even • Xon/Xoff control: Not executed • Communication method: Full duplex • Stop bits: 2 stop bits • Data length: 7 bits • Terminator setting (selector switch) Set this switch to ON (upper position). Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Boards Serial Communications Boards with RS-232C and RS-422A Ports for Use with CS-series CPU Units: CS1W-SCB21 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-232C ports.) CS1W-SCB41 (Port 1 is an RS-232C port and Port 2 is an RS-422A port.) Setting DM Area Allocations in CPU Unit Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (Programming Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction. The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings. 56 Section 3-7 Host Link The allocations and settings are the same for RS-232C and RS-422A (CS1WSCB41 Port 2). Allocated DM Area words Port 1 Port 2 Note Write value Settings DM32000 DM32001 DM32010 DM32011 8000 0000 to 000A (See note 1.) Host Link Mode Baud rate DM32003 DM32013 0000 Unit No. 00 (1) Set the baud rate to the same value as that of the PT. Setting the Front Panel Switches Using RS-422A RDY COMM1 COMM2 Port 1 RS-232C PORT1 OFF ONTERM 2 4 WIRE Port 2 RS-422A/485 Terminating resistance switch (TERM) Set to ON: Terminating resistance used (right position) Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE) For RS-422A: Set to 4 for four-wire (right position). For RS-485: Set to 2 for two-wire (left position). PORT2 (RS422/ RS485) SCB41 Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Units CS1W-SCU21 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-232C ports.) CPU Unit DM Area Settings Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (Programming Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction. The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings. m = 30000 + 100 × unit number Allocated DM Area words Port 1 Port 2 Note Write value Settings DM m DM m+1 DM m+10 DM m+11 8000 Host Link Mode 0000 to 000A (See note 1.) Baud rate DM m+3 DM m+13 0000 Unit No. 00 (1) Set the baud rate to the same value as that of the PT. Setting the Front Panel Switches Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit with the rotary switches on the front of the Unit. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to set the numerals and symbols in the switches setting display window, as follows: 57 Section 3-7 Host Link SCU21 RDY ERH SD2 RD2 RUN ERC SD1 RD1 6543 A987 Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Units • Unit number setting 2F EDCB UNIT No. Set a value between 0 and F that is not the same as that of other Units. CS-series Rack-mounted Type: CJ1W-SCU41 (Port 1 is an RS-422A port and Port 2 is an RS-232C port.) CPU Unit DM Area Settings Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (Programming Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction. The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings. The allocations and settings are the same for RS-232C and RS-422A. m = 30000 + 100 × unit number Allocated DM Area words Note Write value Settings Port 1 DM m Port 2 DM m+10 8000 DM m+1 DM m+3 DM m+11 DM m+13 0000 to 000A (See note 1.) Baud rate 0000 Unit No. 00 Host Link Mode (1) Set the baud rate to the same value as that of the PT. Setting the Front Panel Switches CJ1W-SCU41 SCU41 SD1 RD1 TER1 ERH SD2 RD2 ON WIRE 2 4 345 8 67 9 TERM OFF ABCD RDY E012 RUN ERC Display indicators UNIT NO. PORT1 (RS422 /485) Terminating resistance switch (TERM) Unit number setting switch Set a value between 0 and F that is not the same as these used by other Units in the system. Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE) For RS-422A: Set to 4 for four-wire operation (right position). For RS-485: Set to 2 for two-wire operation (left position). PORT2 Port 1 RS-422A/485 Port 2 RS-232C 58 Section 3-8 Connecting to Temperature Controllers 3-8 3-8-1 Connecting to Temperature Controllers Overview The PT can communicate with up to 31 of EJ1 modular temperature controllers via RS-485 using the PT's COM2 serial port. The PT can also communicate with other host via RS-232C using the COM1 serial port while communicating with the EJ1. NP-series PT Connecting to RS-485 (max.extension:50m) 3-8-2 EJ1 Up to 31 temperature controller scan be connected. Wiring The PT's COM2 is connected to the EJ1's port B via RS-485. For details on the cable wiring diagram, please refer to Appendix D Preparing Connecting Cables for Host Connection. 3-8-3 Communications Settings Set the communication settings of the EJ1 modular temperature controller and PT. The communications settings must be set for the PT using the NP-Designer. For information on how to set EJ1 modular temperature controller, please refer to EJ1 Modular Temperature Controller User's Manual. For information on how to set communication details using the NP-Designer, please refer to 62-4 PT Menu. 59 Section 3-9 Using USB Flash Memory 3-9 Using USB Flash Memory USB flash memory can be used with the PT to perform the following operations. • Transferring screen data from the computer to the PT • Transferring screen data from the PT to the computer • Updating the PT system Precautions for Correct Use 3-9-1 Only FAT 32 formatted USB flash memory can be used. Transferring Data with USB Flash Memory Transferring Screen Data from the Computer to the PT Use the following procedure to transfer screen data created with the NPDesigner to the PT. 1,2,3... 1. Insert the USB flash memory into the computer. 2. Use the NP-Designer's File Menu to transfer the screen data to the USB flash memory. Refer to 6-2-1 File Menu. 3. Set the SW1 slide switch on the back of the PT to ON (left position). Then turn the power of the PT to OFF and then ON. The system menu will be started. 4. Remove the USB flash memory from the computer. Then insert it to the USB (host) connector on the back of the PT. Unless the buzzer is turned OFF, the PT will make a peeping sound when it detects the USB flash memory. 5. Use the file menu of the system menu to transfer the screen data stored in the USB flash memory to the PT. For details, refer to SECTION 4 System Menu for details. 6. Remove the USB flash memory from the PT. 7. Set the SW1 slide switch on the back of the PT to OFF (right position). Transferring Screen Data from the PT to the Computer Use the following procedure to transfer screen data from the PT to the computer. 1,2,3... 1. Insert the USB flash memory to the USB (host) connector on the back of the PT. 2. Set the SW1 slide switch on the back of the PT to ON (left position). Then turn the power of the PT to OFF and then ON. The system menu will be started. 3. Use the file menu of the system menu to transfer the screen data stored in the USB flash memory to the PT. For details, refer to SECTION 4 System Menu. 4. Remove the USB flash memory from the PT. 5. Insert the USB flash memory into the computer. 6. Use the File Menu from the NP-Designer to transfer the screen data stored in the USB flash memory to the PT. For details, refer to 6-2-1 File Menu. 7. Remove the USB flash memory from the computer. 60 Section 3-9 Using USB Flash Memory Updating the PT system Use the following procedure to update the PT system. 1,2,3... 1. Insert the USB flash memory into the computer. 2. Use the File Menu from the NP-Designer to transfer the system program to the USB flash memory. For details, refer to 6-2-1 File Menu. 3. Remove the USB flash memory from the computer. Then insert it into the USB (host) connector. 4. Set the SW1 slide switch on the back of the PT to ON (left position). Then turn the power of the PT to OFF and then ON. The system menu is started up. 5. Use the file menu of the system menu to transfer the system program stored in the USB flash memory to the PT. For details, refer to SECTION 4 System Menu. 6. Remove the USB flash memory from the PT. Precautions for Correct Use • Do not perform the following operations while accessing the USB flash memory. The data may be damaged and the USB flash memory may need to be formatted. • Turn OFF the power to the PT. • Remove the USB flash memory. • Always follow the procedure for removing the USB flash memory from the computer. If the PT system is damaged due to the power being turned OFF while a file is being transferred, or other reason, using normal downloading to replace the system programs may not be possible. For details on troubleshooting, refer to 7-3 Troubleshooting. 61 Using USB Flash Memory 62 Section 3-9 SECTION 4 System Menu This section describes the System Menu. 4-1 Displaying System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 4-2 Functions of System Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 63 Section 4-1 Displaying System Menu 4-1 Displaying System Menu Use one of the following methods to display the System Menu. 1,2,3... 1. Press a Function Switch to which a function that can switch a screen to the System Menu is allocated. For details on Function Switch, refer to 6-2-6 Screen Menu. 2. Press a button to which a function that can switch a screen to the System Menu is allocated. 3. Set the SW1 (slide switch) on the back to the left (ON) and start the PT. 64 Section 4-2 Functions of System Menu 4-2 Functions of System Menu The following buttons are displayed on the System Menu. Press Setting Button to show the following screen. 65 Section 4-2 Functions of System Menu This table describes the function of each button. Item PROCON File Functions Starts Programming Console functions. Set the protocol to NT link (1:N) (standard or high-speed) and set the NT/ PC Link Max. parameter to 0 in the PLC Setup. The Programming Console functions will work only with the 1:N NT Link protocol. It will not work with other protocols. Use a 1:1 connection with a 1:N NT Link connection configuration (standard or high-speed). For details on Programming Console operations, refer to Programming Console Operation Manual (W341) To change the language of the key operation descriptions, press the 3 Key when the LCD shows “JPN→ENG” or “ENG→JPN.” Transfers screen data and system using a USB flash memory. Updates system using a USB flash memory. Initializes the user area of the PT. Downloads screen data from a USB flash memory. Uploads screen data to a USB flash memory. Transfer Serial Transfers screen data and system via a COM port. Select the port to be used in the COM Port Upload/Download Dialog Box so that the PT prepares to receive screen data. To transfer data using a COM port, select PC COM Port option in the Option Dialog Box from Tools Menu of the NP-Designer. 66 Section 4-2 Functions of System Menu Item Functions Transfer Serial 67 Section 4-2 Functions of System Menu Settings Item System Functions Sets the standard settings and communications settings. 1. Standard Settings Buzzer ON/OFF Sets whether a buzzer sound is heard or not. Screen Saver Time Sets the duration of time before the (Min.) screen saver starts. The unit is minute. Startup Delay Time Sets the duration of time before the PT (Sec) starts. The unit is second. Default Language (ID) Sets the default language when using more than one language. 2. Communications settings Sets the communication settings of each COM port. Date/Time 68 Sets the date and time. Section 4-2 Functions of System Menu Settings Item Adjust LCD Functions Adjusts the display. The default settings may not be the most suitable settings for the LCD. Adjusts the contrast. Adjusts the brightness. NP5 does not support this function. Adjusts the refresh rate. Set to Default LCD Sets to the default settings. Put Contrast Center Calibrate Sets the contrast to the center value. Calibrates the displayed position of the screen and the actual position of the touch panel. Markers will appear at the upper left, lower right, and center of the screen. Press each marker in order. Be sure to press the very center of the markers displayed on the screen. Calibrate the screen approximately once every six months under normal conditions and operation. If the PT is used in a severe environment, calibrate the screen more often. Exit Backup Backups data when the battery is replaced. For details, refer to Replacing the Battery in 7-1 Maintenance. Return Returns to the initial screen of the System Menu. Exits the System Menu and switches to the user screen. Even if Exit Button is pressed, the System Menu will not be switched to the user screen when the System Menu was displayed by using a switch on the back of the PT. 69 Functions of System Menu 70 Section 4-2 SECTION 5 Installing and Starting NP-Designer Make sure that you install the NP-Designer on the computer before you use it for the first time. NP-Designer is application software that runs on a Windows 2000 or XP operating system. 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 Preparing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Installing/Uninstalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 5-2-1 Installing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 5-2-2 Uninstalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Starting/Exiting NP-Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 5-3-1 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 5-3-2 Exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Installing USB Drivers for NP-series PTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 71 Section 5-1 Preparing 5-1 Preparing This table shows the system requirements for the NP-Designer. System Requirements Item Operating System (OS) Microsoft Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4) Microsoft Windows XP (Service Pack 2) CPU Pentium III 500 MHz (Pentium III 1 GHz or faster recommended.) Memory Hard Disk 256 MB 100 MB Display SVGA (800 x 600) 256 colors USB port RS-232C port Communications port 72 Minimum Requirements Section 5-2 Installing/Uninstalling 5-2 5-2-1 Installing/Uninstalling Installing 1,2,3... 1. Start Windows 2000 or XP. 2. Put the NP-Designer CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive. The setup program starts automatically. Double-click Setup.exe to start the setup program in this condition: • The setup program does not start automatically 3. Select a setup language. 4. Click OK to show the Select Installation Folder Dialog Box. 5. Click Next> Button to select the default directory C: \Program Files\ OMRON\NP-Designer. Click Browse Button to select a directory. You will see a list of available directories. Select a directory for the NP-Designer, and click OK Button. Click Next> Button for the subsequent step. The Select Components Dialog Box shows. 6. Click Install Button. 7. Click Close Button to complete the setup. (If a dialog box that relates to a logo testing shows, press Continue Anyway Button.) 8. The Software Installation Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the Continue Button. 5-2-2 Uninstalling To uninstall the NP-Designer, select [Start]−[Program]−[OMRON]−[NPDesigner]−[Uninstall]. 73 Section 5-3 Starting/Exiting NP-Designer 5-3 5-3-1 Starting/Exiting NP-Designer Starting Click the Windows Start Button. Select All Programs − OMRON − NP−Designer. • The file that you used last time will open automatically if you select Auto Open for Next Execute Application in the Option Dialog Box. • You will see this window when • You do not select Auto Open for Next Execute Application in the Option Dialog Box or, • You start the NP-Designer for the first time. 5-3-2 Exiting Use one of these operations to exit the NP-Designer. • Select Exit Button from the File Menu. • Click Close Button at the top right corner of the main window. • Double-click the NP-Designer icon at the top left corner of the main window. • Click the NP-Designer icon at the top left corner of the main window, and select Close Button from the control menu box. • Use the keyboard shortcut Alt + F4 Keys. If you did not save the project data that is open, you will see a confirmation message. 74 Installing USB Drivers for NP-series PTs 5-4 Section 5-4 Installing USB Drivers for NP-series PTs Install the NP-series USB driver in the personal computer. After installation, data can be transferred between the personal computer and NP-series PT via USB. Operation Procedure 1,2,3... 1. Connect the personal computer to the NP-series PT USB slave connector using the USB cable. The following Found New Hardware Wizard will be displayed. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended). Click the Next Button. 2. The dialog box shown below will be displayed. Click the Continue Anyway Button. 75 Installing USB Drivers for NP-series PTs Section 5-4 3. When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the Finish Button. When the USB Drivers Cannot Be Installed by Following the Above Procedure 1,2,3... 1. Connect the personal computer to the NP-series PT USB slave connector using the USB cable. The following Found New Hardware Wizard will be displayed. Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced). Click the Next Button. 2. The dialog box shown below will be displayed. Confirm that Search for the best driver in these locations is selected. Select the Include this location in the search option, click the Browse Button and specify the following folder: C:\Program Files\OMRON\NP-Designer\ScrEditApp Click the Next Button. 76 Installing USB Drivers for NP-series PTs Section 5-4 3. The dialog box shown below will be displayed. Click the Continue Anyway Button. 4. When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the Finish Button. 77 Installing USB Drivers for NP-series PTs 78 Section 5-4 SECTION 6 NP-Designer Functions This section describes the action to take when NT30/30C errors occur, and how to carry out maintenance and inspections to prevent the occurrence of errors. 6-1 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 6-2 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 6-3 6-2-1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-2 Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-4 PT Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-5 Objects Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-6 Screen Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-7 Tools Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-8 Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-9 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 87 95 96 112 117 125 127 128 129 6-4 Object Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 6-5 6-4-1 Selecting Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-2 Common Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-3 Button Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-4 Meter (1 to 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-5 Meter (4 to 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-6 Level Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-7 Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-8 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-9 Data Display Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-10 Draw Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-11 Input Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-12 Line Graph Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-13 Data Log Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-14 Alarm Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-15 Fixed Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 135 137 145 147 148 151 154 157 159 165 167 170 176 179 184 6-6 6-5-1 Macro Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5-2 Editing Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5-3 Macro Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5-4 Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Block and Status Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 185 189 212 215 6-7 6-6-1 Control Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6-2 Status Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6-3 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 219 223 224 Note This section uses color NP-series PTs to tell the NP-Designer functions. 79 Section 6-1 User Interface 6-1 User Interface Basic Screen Menu bar Tool bar Property Workspace Output Window Status bar Property Property List The Property List sets the properties for each object. You can also refer to 6-4 Object Functions. Object state selection All objects on an editing screen 80 Section 6-1 User Interface Screen editing preview Output Window The output window shows all user actions. If you use the validation function, this window also shows a message for each error. Click an error message to show the window that contains the error object. Status Bar The status bar shows editing status. Status Selected download method Current mouse position PT model Num Lock Caps Lock Scroll Lock [Mouse position] @ position of selected object from upper left of window Width and height of the selected object 81 Section 6-2 Menus 6-2 Menus The NP-Designer has menus. You can use these menus to set the objects, pictures, graphs, macro programs, data blocks and create screen data to show them on NP-series PTs. This section tells you about the pull-down menu options. 6-2-1 File Menu ■ New This command creates a new project. To create a new project, • select the File Menu − New, • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + N. 1. If no project is open, you will see this dialog box. Reference The NP-Designer creates sample screen data when you select EJ1 from the Protocol option. 82 Section 6-2 Menus 2. If other project files are open, you will see this dialog box. • Click the Yes Button to save the file. • Click the No Button to close and not save the file. • Click the Cancel Button to close the dialog box. If you click the Yes or No Button, you will see the New Project Dialog Box again. 3. Input each item in the New Project Dialog Box. Then click the OK Button. ■ Open This command opens a project file. To open a project, • select the File Menu − Open, • click the icon in the toolbar or, • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + O. 1. If there are other project files and you did not save them, you will see a dialog box to save the files. Click the Yes or No Button. 2. You will see the Open dialog box. Select an npp file from this dialog box, and click the Open Button. ■ Close This command closes a project file. To close a project, select the File Menu − Close. ■ Save This command saves a project file. 83 Section 6-2 Menus To save a project, • select the File Menu − Save, • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + S. If the project is a new file, you will see the Save As Dialog Box. If the project is not a new file, the saving operation starts immediately. ■ Save As This command saves a file with a new file name. 1. Select the File Menu − Save As. You will see Save As Dialog Box. 1,2,3... 2. Input a project name with a file extension of npp. 3. Click the Save Button. The NP-Designer shows this dialog automatically if you save a project file for the first time when you use Save As or Save command. ■ Transfer System&Screen [To PT via USB Flash Memory] This function transfers screen data to a PT via USB flash memory. 84 Section 6-2 Menus 1. Select File Menu − Transfer System&Screen [To PT via USB Flash Memory]. You will see the Browse for Folder Dialog Box. 1,2,3... 2. Specify the destination to copy the screen to a USB flash memory. You can insert this USB flash memory into an NP-series PT to transfer the screen data to the NP-series PT. For details, refer to 3-9 Using USB Flash Memory. ■ Open USB Flash Memory Data This command opens USB flash memory data. To open USB flash memory data, • select the File Menu − Open USB Flash Memory Data or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + I. 1,2,3... 1. The users can move the screen data saved in the flash memory into USB flash memory through folder manager. 2. If you use the Open USB Flash Memory Data function, you will see the Browse For Folder Dialog Box. 3. You can open the screen data, and edit the data. ■ Data Security This command enables and disables the data security function. To enable or disable the data security function, select the File Menu − Data Security. When the data security function is enabled, you will see the symbol adjacent to the [Data Security] command and a dialog box. This dialog box tells that you must use a password to open the npp file. To set the password, select PT Menu and set it in the PT Setting Dialog Box. 85 Section 6-2 Menus ■ Print This command prints screen data. To print screen data, • select the File Menu − Print, • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + P. ■ Preview This command shows a preview of the printed image. To see a preview of the screen, select the File Menu − Print Preview. ■ Print Setup This command sets the properties, print range and the number of copies. To set print settings, select the File Menu − Print Setup. ■ Last Used Files The File menu shows a list of the last four used files. To open these files, select a file name from the File Menu. 86 Section 6-2 Menus ■ Exit This command exits the NP-Designer. To exit a project file, select the File Menu − Exit. 6-2-2 Edit Menu ■ Undo This command undoes the last action shown in the output window log. Operations on properties that are not shown in the output window log are not undone. To undo the operation, • select the Edit Menu − Undo, • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Z. ■ Redo This command redoes the undo action. The output window shows all actions. To redo the operation, • select the Edit Menu − Redo, • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Y. ■ Cut This command deletes the selected object, and save it in clipboard to paste to other position. To cut an object, • select the Edit Menu − Cut, • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + X. ■ Copy This command copies the selected object to the clipboard. To copy an object, • select the Edit Menu − Copy, 87 Section 6-2 Menus • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + C. ■ Paste This command pastes an object in the clipboard. To paste an object, • select the Edit Menu − Paste, • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + V. ■ Delete This command deletes the selected object. To delete an object, • select the Edit Menu − Delete or • use the keyboard shortcut Del. ■ Select All This command selects all objects. When you select all objects, the NP-Designer uses the base object to align or resize. The base object has blue marks. To delete all objects, • select the Edit Menu − Select All or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + A. ■ Find This command uses conditions to find labels or addresses. To show the Find Dialog Box, • select the Edit Menu − Find or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + F. 88 Section 6-2 Menus Find Dialog Box Find What Enter the label or address that you look for. Options Current Screen Examines the current screen only and finds the label or address that you look for. All Screen Label Examines all screens and finds the label or address that you look for. Finds the label that you enter. Read Address Write Address Finds the read address that you enter. Finds the write address that you enter. All Address Finds all read addresses and write addresses that you enter. Type Match whole Finds only the labels or addresses that you entered. If you do not word only select the [Match whole word only] option, it finds all contents that include the labels or addresses that you entered. Support Multi-Language Finding ■ Finds all multi-language contents that include the labels or addresses you entered. You can use the [Support Multi-Language Finding] option when you find labels. Replace This command replaces labels, read addresses and write addresses in the current screen or all screens. The replacement data type can be Bit, Word or Double Word. You can change the data type only for read addresses and write addresses. To show the Replace Dialog Box, • select the File Menu − Replace or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + H. Replace Dialog Box Find What Replace With Enter a label or address that you look for. Enter a label or address that you replace with. 89 Section 6-2 Menus Options Type Current Screen All Screen Examines all screens to find the label or address that you look for and replaces it. Label Read Address Finds and replaces the label that you entered. Finds and replaces the read address that you entered. Finds and replaces the write address that you entered. Write Address Data Type Replace Replace All ■ Replace Dialog Box Examines the current screen only to find the label or address that you look for and replaces it. Bit WORD Selects Bit, Word or Double Word. DWORD Replaces the label or address that you entered and finds the subsequent one. For example, to replace the write address $157 with $158, enter $157 in Find What field and $158 in Replace With field. Click Replace Button. NP-Designer will find the address. Click Yes Button to replace the address. Replaces the label or address automatically with all contents that you entered. Replace Host Unit No. Replace Host Unit No. Dialog Box Find Unit No Sets the unit number to be replaced. Replace Unit Sets the host number for after replacement. No Host Name Option ■ Specifies the host name. Selects the items for replacement. Hosts of the checked items will be replaced. Group This command groups the selected objects. When you group two or more objects, they will become one unit. Thus, when you move or change the objects, you will move or change them together. You cannot make grouped objects and other object a group. To group objects, • select the File Menu − Group 90 Section 6-2 Menus • click the icon in the toolbar, or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + G. ■ Ungroup This command ungroups selected objects. To group objects, • select the File Menu − Ungroup • click the icon in the toolbar, or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + U. ■ Edit Nodes This command edits, adds or removes the nodes of Polygon objects to change their shapes. To show the nodes of fitted objects, select the Edit Menu − Edit Nodes. To edit, add or removes nodes, follow the procedure below. 1. Editing Nodes 1,2,3... 1. Move the cursor above the node. When the cursor changes to, drag the cursor to the new position for the node. 2. Click the right mouse button to close the edit mode for nodes. 2. Adding Nodes 1,2,3... 1. Click the Ctrl Key and move the cursor above the border of the object. When the shape changes to, left-click the position on the border where you add the node. 2. Click the right mouse button to close the edit mode for nodes. 3. Removing Nodes 1,2,3... 1. Click the Ctrl Key and move the cursor above the node you delete. When the shape changes to , left- click the node. 2. Click the right mouse button to close the edit mode for nodes. ■ Order This command changes the stacking order of the selected object. To change the order, • select each command from the Edit Menu − Order or • click the order icons in the toolbar The Order icons include: Bring to Top Moves the selected object to the front. Send to Bottom Moves the selected object to the behind. Bring Forward Moves the selected object one step near the front. Send Backward Moves the selected object one step to the behind. 91 Section 6-2 Menus ■ Align This command aligns the objects. You can use this command only when you select more than one object. The NP-Designer refers to the base object to align the objects. To align the objects, • select each command from the Edit Menu − Align or • click the align icons in the toolbar. The Align icons include: ■ Align Left Aligns the selected objects to the left side of the base object. Align Right Aligns the selected objects to the right side of the base object. Align Top Aligns the selected objects to the top of the base object. Align Bottom Aligns the selected objects to the bottom of the base object. Align Vert. Center Aligns the objects to the vertical center of the selected objects. Align Horiz. Center Aligns the objects to the horizontal center of the selected objects. Across Space Evenly Horizontally aligns all objects to the equal distances from all objects. Down Space Evenly Vertically aligns all objects to the equal distances from all objects. Make Same Size This command makes the object to be the same size. The users must select one object first as reference object, and then select other objects. To use this command, • select each command from the Edit Menu − Make Same Size or • click the make same size icons in the toolbar. ■ Make Same Width Makes the same width. Make Same Height Makes the same height. Both Makes the same width and height. Text Process Text Alignment To align the text, • select each command from the Edit − Text Process or • click the text process icons in the toolbar. The text alignment icons include: Text Align Left Aligns the selected text to the left end of the object. Text Align Horiz. Aligns the horizontal center of the object. Center 92 Section 6-2 Menus Import Text Text Align Right Aligns the selected text to the right end of the object. Text Align Top Aligns the selected text to the top of the object. Text Align Vert. Center Aligns the vertical center of the object. Text Align Bottom Aligns the selected text to the bottom of the object. Add Underline Adds the line below the selected text. This command imports the text from Text Library. To show the Text Library Dialog Box, select the PT Menu − Text Library. If you select the Use Text Library Edit Font option in the Import Text Dialog Box, the imported text shows in the font of Text Library. For details on the Text Library settings, refer to Text Library of 6-2-4 PT Menu. ■ Repeat This command multiplies the selected objects horizontally or vertically. To show the Repeat Dialog Box. • select the Edit Menu − Repeat, or 93 Section 6-2 Menus • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + W. Repeat Dialog Box Number of Copies (Columns/Rows) Space (Horizontal/Vertical) X-Direction/Y-Direction Offset Address Repeat Example: Step 1 94 Sets the horizontal and vertical quantities. The quantities include the source object. Sets the horizontal and vertical spacing between objects in dot unit. Selects one of check boxes to increase or decrease the address. Sets the offset value for addresses added when objects are repeated to between −10,000 and 10,000. Section 6-2 Menus Step 2 6-2-3 View Menu ■ Toolbar, Property and Output Window These commands show or hide the Toolbar, Property or Output Window. To show or hide, select each command. ■ Grid This function aligns the objects easily and accurately. You can set the distance (spacing) between the grid dots freely. To use this function, select View Menu − Grid. Grid Settings Dialog Box Show Grid Snap to Grid Spacing Width Shows the grid dots on the screen. Makes objects snap to the grid when you move them. Sets the width to between 4 and 50. Height Sets the height to between 4 and 50. 95 Section 6-2 Menus Example of Grid Display: 6-2-4 PT Menu ■ Transfer Transfer [From PT] This function transfers screen data from a PT to a computer. 1,2,3... 1. Select the PT Menu − Transfer [From PT] or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Shift + B. You will see the password dialog box. 2. Input your password (The highest level password stored in the NP-Designer). You will see the Save As Dialog Box. 3. Input the project file name. Click the OK Button. The transfer will start. When the progress bar shows 100%, the transfer is completed. Then the uploaded screen data will be open. The progress bar shows the progress during the transfer. You can click the Stop Button to stop the transfer. Note 96 When you transfer the screen data, you cannot upload the settings made with the PT system menu. Section 6-2 Menus Transfer System [To PT] This function transfers the system or adds functions to a PT To transfer the system to the PT, select the PT Menu − Transfer − Transfer System [To PT]. Transfer [To PT] This function transfers the screen data to the PT. To transfer the screen data to the PT, • select the PT Menu − Transfer [To PT], • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + B. The progress bar shows the progress of transfer. If you cannot connect the computer to the PT, you will see these error messages. The download interface can be USB or RS-232 when you use a cable to transfer the screen data. To set the download interface, 1. Select the Tools Menu − Option 1,2,3... 2. Set the interface in the Transfer Setting Field of the Option Dialog Box. Transfer Screen [To PT] This function transfers only screens to a PT. To use this function, • select the PT Menu − Transfer Screen [To PT], • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + F9. ■ Transfer System [To PT via USB Flash Memory] This function transfers the systems from a computer to a PT via USB flash memory. NP-Designer shows this menu only when a project is closed. To use this function, select the PT Menu - Transfer System [To PT via USB Flash Memory] when a project is closed. Precautions for Correct Use Always ensure that communication settings are correct before transfer. If communication settings are incorrect, the touch reaction may be slower. 97 Section 6-2 Menus ■ Data Block Data blocks (recipes) make it possible to read/write values to memory areas of PLCs. To use the data block function, you must make settings with the Data Block Setting Dialog Box and control from the control block. To show the Data Block Setting Dialog Box, select the PT Menu − Data Block. Data Block Setting Dialog Box Enable Data Block This option enables or disables the data block function. To disable the data block function, deselect this option. Address This option can input the starting address. Click the Button to show the address input dialog box. This option can set the data block size to 1 word or more. No. of Fields 98 No. of Groups This option can set the number of groups to 1 or more. Input You can edit the data block data after you set the No. of Fields and No. of groups of the data block. There is a limit in the memory size for data block. If you select the SRAM in the Hold Data Place Field with the Data Block Setting Dialog Box, the memory size for data block is 64K.The total data block size must be less than 64K. (No. of Fields x No. of groups must be less than 64 X 1024) Section 6-2 Menus Data Block Setting Dialog Box Input Open Save ■ You can open the data block data. The data block data you opened do not contain the starting address. You can save the edited data block data to a file. When the NPDesigner saves the data block file, it will not save the starting address. Reset You can delete all related data block setting and input data block data. Clear Print You can clear all input data block to 0. You can print all data block data on the current screen. OK Cancel You can save the set data block data. You can discard the changes and close the Data Block Setup Dialog box. Alarm Setting The alarm function shows a message when the registered address fits the specified conditions. To use this alarm function, you must make settings with the Alarm Setting Dialog Box and an alarm object. For details on alarm object settings, refer to 6-4 Object Functions. 99 Section 6-2 Menus To show the Alarm Setting Dialog Box, select the PT Menu − Alarm Setting. Alarm Setting Dialog Box Alarm Setting Address of This option can set the alarm starting address. You can Alarm Block set the address to a minimum of 512 alarms, 32 Words. Scan Time (s) This option can set the time interval to monitor. The unit is second. Number of This option can set the number of occurred alarms to Records in record. History Buffer When the number of records becomes more than the set value, it will delete the first record and insert the new record into the last address. Non-volatile You can select this option to save data in the SRAM when the power supply is cut. The SRAM can save a maximum of 8K bytes of alarm data. (The power of SRAM is battery when the power supply is cut.) Property The Alarm Setting Dialog Box also supports the multilanguage function. There are three languages in the above example. Click each tab to edit the message. Message This option can input messages that alarm objects show when alarms occur. Color This option can set colors that alarm objects show when alarms occur. 100 Detection Type This option can set the alarm detection condition. You can set it to ON or OFF. Screen This option can set the screens that the PT shows when alarms occur. Section 6-2 Menus Banner Enable Position Direction Alarm Setting Dialog Box This option enables or disables the Message Banner. This option can set the display position of the message banner. The position can be Top or Bottom. Left Message will move from right to left. Right Up Movement Distance Interval (ms) Background Color Message will move from left to right. Message will move from bottom to top. Down Message will move from top to bottom. This option can set the movement distance for the message banner. The range is between 1 and 50 dots. This option can set the interval time for the message banner. The range is between 50 and 3000 ms. This option can set the background color of the message banner. Delete You can delete the message. Select the number to delete. Open The existing alarm setting information will be cleared, and data in the Alarm Describe File format will be imported. The setting data and alarm message in the Alarm Setting Dialog Box will be converted to a file in the Alarm Describe File format and exported. Save Close You can exit the Alarm Setting Dialog Box. (1) Exporting and importing Alarm Describe Files can be used to apply alarm settings from other projects. Note (2) Do not edit Alarm Describe Files with a text editor. Doing so may make it impossible to import them. ■ Data Log Setting You must use the Data Log Setting together with sampling objects. To show the Data Log Setting Dialog Box, select the PT Menu − Data Log Setting. For details on objects, refer to 6-4 Object Functions. Data Log Setting Dialog Box 101 Section 6-2 Menus Append Data Log Setting Dialog Box You can input necessary items and add a maximum of 12 data logs. Read This option can set the starting address that samples the Address data log data. Data Length This option can set the word length for sampling. The range is between 1 and 13 continuous words. You can sample a maximum of 13 continuous words. Example When the Data Length is 6, the PT samples continuous 6 words ($M100, $M101,.....,$M105). When the Log Points is 100, the PT samples 6 words x 100 = 600 each time. Sampling Cycle Log Points Trigger This option can set the sampling cycle time to read the address (The length of time to read the address one time). If you set the Trigger option to the Control Flag (OFF→ON), the Sampling Cycle option is disabled. The range of the sampling cycle time is between 0 and 86400000 ms. This option can set the log points. You can select one of these logging timing. • On Sampling Cycle The PT logs on the sampling cycle timing set in the Sampling Cycle Field. • Control Flag (OFF→ON) The PT logs when the control flag turns from OFF to ON. Stamp Time You can select this option to record the time and date and Date during sampling operation. Auto Stop You can set whether to stop logging or not when the PT has the number of logs you set. • Select this option to stop logging the data after the number of logs becomes the set value of Log Points option. • Deselect this option to delete the final log and insert the new record into the last address when the number of data logged is larger than the set value of the Log Points option. Non-Volatile You can select this option to save data in SRAM when the power supply is cut. The SRAM can save a maximum of 240K bytes of sampling data. (The power of SRAM is battery when the power supply is cut.) OK You can save the data and exit the Buffer Properties Dialog Box. Cancel 102 You can discard the changes and exits the Buffer Properties Dialog Box. Section 6-2 Menus ■ Delete Data Log Setting Dialog Box You can delete data logs. Modify You can change data logs. Symbol Table This function names addresses. For example, you can name [SERIALA:DM00100] [Symbol_A]. To show the Symbol Table Dialog Box, select the PT Menu − Symbol Table. Symbol Table Dialog Box Open You can open a tag file. Save You can save the settings made with the Symbol Table Dialog Box as a tag file. Add You can add a symbol. 1. Select the Internal Memory or SELEALA. (Host names are shown on the third or more tabs.) 2. Click the Add Button. Do not add a symbol with only a number or with the same address. Delete You can delete the selected row. 1. Use the mouse to select a row to delete. 2. Click the Delete Button. The selected row is deleted. You can discard the changes and exit the dialog box. Close Reference • If you do not input a name or address and click the Close Button, you will see a warning message. ■ PT Setting PT Setting Dialog Box contains Standard, Comm., Default and Multi-language Tab Pages. This section describes these tabs. 103 Section 6-2 Menus To show the PT Setting Dialog Box, select the PT Menu − PT Setting. Standard Tab in PT Setting Dialog Box Project Name This option can set the project name. Model Hold Data Place This option can select a PT model you use. This option can save the backup memory data in SRAM or USB flash memory. This option can set the delay time for the startup of the PT. The range is between 0 and 255 seconds. This option can set the interval time to use the project periodic macro. The range is between 100 and 65535ms. Startup Delay Time Project Periodic Macro Delay Time Password Starting Level This option can set a highest level password. You can set this password with one-bye numerics. You use the password when you transfer a project file and open a file. This option can set the starting level. There are 8 levels. The highest level is 7 and the lowest level is 0. Prompt For Level Insufficient You can select this option to show a mark on objects when the user level is lower than the levels of objects. Address (Control Block) This option can set the starting address of system control block. Refer to 6-6 Control Block and Status Block. Size This option can set the length of control block. When the control block size is 0, the control block function is disabled. Clear flag after done You can select this option to clear the address in the control block to 0 when an operation was completed in the control block. Address (Status Block) 104 This option can set the starting address of system status block. Refer to 6-6 Control Block and Status Block. Section 6-2 Menus Standard Tab in PT Setting Dialog Box Optimize Dynamic This option can optimize all objects that read addresses on the screen when the PT switches screens. Optimize Type Note When you select this function, all objects that read addresses on the screen will show incorrect values for a short time. All objects show correct values after optimization is completed. Optimize Static System Menu Language This option can optimize all objects that read addresses on the screen during validation operation. This option can set a language for the System Menu. Communication Tab in PT Setting Dialog Box Add/Delete Con- Add troller Connection Delete Modify Protocol Settings- PT Unit No. 1 Host Unit No. You can give a host name and sets a protocol. Some hosts cannot simultaneously communicate via 2 ports. For details, refer to 1-1 Supported Hosts in the Host Connection Manual. You can delete a host. You cannot delete the host No.1. Interface You can change a host name and protocol. This option can set the PT unit number. The range is between 0 and 255. This option can set the host unit number. If you do not do this setting, the host unit number will be the default setting. The range is between 0 and 255. This option can set the communication interface. Data Bits Stop Bits You can select 7 Bits or 8 Bits. You can select 1 Bit or 2 Bits. Baud rate You can select 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200. It is possible to enter the value directly. Maximum setting value cannot be more than 150000. You can select None, Odd or Even. Parity 105 Section 6-2 Menus Communication Tab in PT Setting Dialog Box Protocol Settings- COM Port This option can set the COM port that communi2 cates with PT (COM1 or COM2). Password A password is necessary for some PLCs before communication. You can set a password with onebyte numerics. Comm. Delay This option can set the delay time before the host starts. The range is between 0 and 255 ms. Timeout Retry Count This option can set the communication timeout time when the PT communicates with the host. The range is between 20 and 65535ms. This option can set the retry counts. You will see a communication error dialog box if the number of times that the PT sends a command becomes the same as the retry counts. The range is between 0 and 255 times. Optimize You can select this option to optimize all read addresses of all related objects. Size Limit You can select this option to keep the screen update speed when the PT reads continuous addresses. This function is available only when you select Optimize Type − Optimize Static in the Standard Tab. You can select this option to stop the communication with the host after the communication interruption times becomes the same as the setting time. Thus, it is possible to hide the communication error dialog box on the PT screen when the communication error occurs after the PT retries. The range is between 1 and 255 times. Communication Interrupt N times then cancel Default Tab in PT Setting Dialog Box 106 Section 6-2 Menus System Default Value Default Tab in PT Setting Dialog Box Start up Screen This option can set the first display screen when PT starts. Default Data Format This option can set the default data format of objects. Default Screen Background This option can set the default screen background color of a new screen. System Error Display Time This option can set the display time of the system error message dialog box. The range is between 0 and 5 seconds. Note If you set 0, the PT does not show the system error message dialog box. Object Default Value Object Font Name This option can set the default object font. Object Font Size This option can set the default object font size. Object Font Color This option can set the default object font color. Flicker Time This option can set the default object flicker (blink) time. Multi-Language Tab in PT Setting Dialog Box 107 Section 6-2 Menus Saver Screen 108 Multi-Language Tab in PT Setting Dialog Box For details on how to set the saver screens, refer to 6-2-6 Screen Menu. Enable Saver Screen • You can select this option to use Edit Saver Screen function in Screen Maintenance option. • You can deselect this option to not start the screen set with Edit Saver Screen function. After the set time elapsed, the PT does not show the saver screen and stops the backlight. Read Host Address • You can select this option to enable the screen saver. When the user touches the PT screen, the screen saver function is disabled. • When the setting value is 0: The PT disables the screen saver function. • When the setting value is a non-zero value: The PT enables the screen saver function. • You can deselect this option to start up the screen saver automatically when the Screen Saver Time set in the PT elapsed. When the user touches the PT screen, the screen saver function is disabled. Interval Time At Two Saver Screen This option can set the interval time between two screen savers. The range is between 1 and 255 seconds. Ending of Saver Screen Mode Return Original: The screen goes back to the original screen when the screen saver starts. Indicate Screen: You can specify the screen to show after the screen saver ends. Section 6-2 Menus Screen Data MultiLanguage New Multi-Language Tab in PT Setting Dialog Box This option can add a maximum of 8 languages. • Enter the language name and value. The system will refer to the value. The range of the setting value is between 0 and 255. • To select the flag color on the language name tab, click the Button. Enable/Disable Remove Modify ■ You can set which languages are enabled or disabled when you download data to the PT. You can remove a language. There must be a minimum of one language for a project. You can change the language name and value. Default Sets the default language when using more than one language. Enable Edit MultiLanguage User Interface You can select this option to enable the multi-language user interface and view the multi-language display in the property list. See below example. System Macro There are Startup Macro, Project Resident Macro, Project Periodic Macro and Sub-macro. For details, refer to 6-5 Macro Function. ■ Library This function imports and saves many pictures to the Library. 109 Section 6-2 Menus To show the Library Dialog Box, select the PT Menu − Library. Library Dialog Box Click the Library option to browse all pictures saved in the Library. When one picture is selected, the preview window shows the picture. To show the selected picture in a real size, double left click on the picture. New Library This icon creates a new library. If you click this icon, the New Picture Library Dialog Box shows. This icon opens a library file (*.pib file). Open Library Delete Picture Library This icon uninstalls the selected library. The library will goes to the Recycle Bin. This icon updates the picture library. Update Picture Library 110 Section 6-2 Menus Import Picture Export Library Dialog Box This icon imports pictures into the specified library. The formats of the pictures can be BMP, JPG, GIF (static) and ICO pictures. To import pictures, 1. Click this icon. You will see the Select Picture Dialog Box. 2. Select pictures. This icon exports pictures in BMP format from the library. This icon deletes pictures in the library. Delete Picture Shortcut Menu ■ To show the shortcut menu, right-click on the picture. The shortcut menu shows a list of commands related to library. Text Library This function enables you to input frequently used text into the Text Library. It is possible to select the text from the Text Library and enter them on the object. 111 Section 6-2 Menus To use the Text Library, select the PT Menu − Text Library. Text Library Dialog Box Add Delete You can add the text into the Text Library. You can input the text in different language, set each font and save them in the Text Library. You can delete the input text in the Text Library. Open Save You can open and import the text or terms into the Text Library. You can save and export the text file. Close You can exit the Text Library Dialog Box. Reference Do not use a text editor to edit txt files. If you do this, you cannot possibly open the txt files. 6-2-5 Objects Menu The NP-Designer has 12 types of objects and has many functions. The 12 types include button, analog meter, level meter, pipe, lamp, data display, graph display, input, curve, data log, alarm and fixed objects. For details on object properties, refer to 6-4 Object Functions. 112 Section 6-2 Menus ■ 1,2,3... Creating Object 1. Right-click the mouse in the workspace to select an object. 2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse cursor. 3. Release the left mouse button to create an object. 4. Set the object property. ■ 1,2,3... Moving Object 1. Move the mouse cursor above the object. The mouse cursor changes into icon. 113 Section 6-2 Menus 2. Hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse to move the object. 3. When the object is in the correct position, release the left mouse button. ■ 1,2,3... Changing Object Width 1. Move the mouse cursor to the edge of the object. The cursor will change the icon. 2. Hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse to change the object width. 3. When the object width is correct, release the left mouse button. ■ 1,2,3... Changing Object Height 1. Move the mouse cursor to the edge of the object. The cursor will change the 114 icon. Section 6-2 Menus 2. Hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse to change the object height. 3. When the object height is correct, release the left mouse button. ■ 1,2,3... Changing Object Width and Height at the Same Time 1. 1.Move the mouse cursor to the edge of the object. The cursor will change the icon. 2. Hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse to change the object height and width. 3. When the object height and width are correct, release the left mouse button. ■ Inputting Characters You can use one of these procedures to input characters. • Move the mouse cursor in the Label field of the Property to make the cursor shape. • Select the object and click the space key. 115 Section 6-2 Menus ■ Right-clicking the Mouse When you right-click the mouse, you will see different menus. • Right-click in the toolbar The Toolbars Display Setup Menu shows. • Right-click on the workspace. The Object Selection Menu shows. 116 Section 6-2 Menus • Right-click on the object. The Object Editing Menu shows. 6-2-6 Screen Menu ■ New This function creates a new screen. Up to 1,000 screens can be created in one project. To create a new screen, • select the Screen Menu − New, 117 Section 6-2 Menus • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Shift + N. You can give a name and ID for the new screen. ■ Open This command opens a screen. To open a screen, • select the Screen Menu − New, • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Shift + O. When you select this command, you can preview each screen in Open Screen Dialog Box. ■ Maintenance This function does screen maintenance. You can copy, paste, cut screens and specify saver screens. To set the saver screen settings, select the PT Menu − PT Setting − Multi-Language Tab Page. To select saver screens, do these procedures. 118 Section 6-2 Menus Selecting Saver Screens 1,2,3... 1. Select the Maintenance from the Screen Menu to open the Screen maintenance window. 2. Right-click the mouse to select the Edit Saver Screen function. 3. Drag the mouse to specify the saver screen. 119 Section 6-2 Menus Deleting Saver Screens Select a saver screen that you want to delete. Then press the [Delete] key. ■ Cut This command cuts the full screen to paste it to clipboard. To cut the full screen, select the Screen Menu − Cut. Reference It is not possible to undo the cut operation. The cut command deletes the screen and its operation is the same as the delete command. But you can paste the screen to have the same screen. After you select the Cut command, you will see this dialog. ■ Copy This command copies the full screen. To copy the full screen, select the Screen Menu − Copy. ■ Paste This command pastes a screen. All screen setting will be the same as source screen. The NP-Designer gives a screen name automatically. To paste a screen, select the Screen Menu − Paste ■ Delete This command deletes the current screen and objects. To delete, select the Screen Menu − Delete. Reference It is not possible to undo the delete operation. After you select the Delete command, you will see the dialog box below. Make sure that you select a correct screen before you delete. ■ Export Image This command exports a screen to image To export, • select the Screen Menu − Export Image, or • click the 120 icon in the toolbar. Section 6-2 Menus ■ Import Image This command imports an image to be the ground of the editing screen. You can import BMP, JPG, GIF and ICO. To import, select the Screen Menu − Import Image. ■ Clear Imported Image This command deletes an imported image. To delete, select the Screen Menu − Clear Imported Image. ■ Start Macro For details on how to use and edit, refer to 6-5 Macro Function. ■ End Macro For details on how to use and edit, refer to 6-5 Macro Function. ■ Screen Periodic Macro For details on how to use and edit, refer to 6-5 Macro Function. ■ Function Switch This function specifies functions for function switches used on screens of NPseries PTs. Setting the Function Switch 1,2,3... 1. If the Function Switch Window is not on the screen, select the Screen Menu − Function Switch. 2. Press a Function Switch. A menu shows. 3. Click a function. 121 Section 6-2 Menus Reference • The System Menu function is set by default. The function switches below have the System Menu function. ■ Model Three Function Switches Function Switch Middle Six Function Switches F6 Properties This function sets the properties of the current screen. To set properties, • select the Screen Menu − Properties. 122 Section 6-2 Menus • select the Details of the Properties from the List Tab Page of the Property. Screen Properties Dialog Box Screen No. The range is between 1 and 65535. You cannot use the same number two times. 123 Section 6-2 Menus Pop-up Screen Use as Pop-up screen Screen Properties Dialog Box A Pop-up screen shows on the current screens The Pop-up screens are not closed even when the user switches base screens. Width This option can set the width of pop-up screen. The unit is dot. The minimum value is 32 dots. Height This option can set the height of pop-up screen. The unit is dot. The minimum value is 32 dots. Pop-up screen Position This option can show the pop-up screen on the center of the PT screen or on a position you specify. To specify the position, • input the coordinate value directly (X and Y axis) or • press the mouse button Use Title Bar Screen Periodic Macro Delay Fast Refresh Rate Sheet 124 to drag the pop-up screen. You can select this option to show the title bar on the pop-up screen. This option can set the time interval to execute the Screen Periodic Macro. The range can be between 100ms and 5s. There are three levels, high, medium and low. This function shows four objects immediately after PT switches screens. Note Each screen renews only four objects immediately. To set which objects to be renewed, select Yes in Fast Refresh Field of the property of each object. Applied a Sheet You can select this option to use other screen as a sheet. The sheet will be background sheet behind all objects. Section 6-2 Menus 6-2-7 Tools Menu ■ Validation This command validates a project file. If the project is a new project, you will see the Save As Dialog Box before validation. If the project is not a new project, this command does a validation immediately. The Output Window shows the validation results. If there is no error, this command creates a file. To do the validation, • select the Tools Menu − Validation, • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + E. Example: Debugging Validation Errors During Validation Process 1. Create a new project. 2. Create two editing screens. 3. Create a button object on each screen. Do not change the object default property. 4. Click the icon to do validation operation. You will see an error message dialog box that shows the number of errors. In the dialog below, there are two errors and the output window shows the errors. 5. Click the error message to switch to the error screen automatically. 125 Section 6-2 Menus ■ Test This function tests if the read/write addresses and macro of editing screen are correct or not on a created program. It is not necessary to connect the PLC. To do the test, • click the Tools − Test • click the icon in the toolbar or • use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + T. Reference With the Test function, it is not possible to save the date and time settings. ■ Option This function sets the environment settings of NP-Designer. To show the Option Dialog Box, select the Tools Menu − Option. Option Dialog Box Output Path 126 This option can set the location where NP-Designer saves the output file after validation. Some functions (Test and file transfer) refer to the files in this location. Section 6-2 Menus Options Option Dialog Box Toolbars/Windows This option can show or hide the toolbars or windows. Language You can select English, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, or Japanese. Transfer Setting This option can set the communication interface (USB 1.1 or PC COM Port) for transfer. Auto Saving.... Time Interval This option can save the file at the specified time interval. The setting range is between 0 and 120 minutes. Auto Open for Next This option can automatically open the file that Execute Applicayou last used when the NP-Designer starts. tion Include Picture This option can transfer all pictures from the PT Data For Uploading to the computer when you upload screen data. 6-2-8 Auto Convert Input Address To Symbol Name For example, to replace address “SERIALA:DM00100” with the word “Symbol_A”, you must first make this setting in Symbol Table. When this option is selected, the NP-Designer automatically changes the input address “SERIALA:DM00100” to the word “Symbol_A”. The font size of Display read/write This option can set the font size of display read and write addresses. Reinstall PT USB Drive You can reinstall the PT USB driver. Uninstall PT USB Drive OK You can uninstall the PT USB driver. Cancel You can discard the changes and exit the Option Dialog Box. You can save the changes and exit the Option Dialog Box. Window Menu This table tells you about the commands in the Window Menu and their functions. Menu Function Shortcut keys Close Window Close All Windows This function hides the current window. This function hides all windows. Next Window Moves the focus from the current window to the next window. Shift+PgDn Previous Window Moves the focus from the current window to the previous window. Shift+PgUp Cascade This function cascades the screen windows. This function tiles the screen windows horizontally. Tile Horizontal 127 Section 6-2 Menus 6-2-9 Menu Tile Vertical Function This function tiles the screen windows vertically. Window List This function shows a list of all open screens. The front screen has a check mark. Shortcut keys Help Menu ■ About NP-Designer This command shows the version information of the NP-Designer. To show the information, • select the Help Menu − About NP-Designer or • click the 128 icon in the toolbar. Section 6-3 Toolbars 6-3 Toolbars This section tells you about toolbars. For details on each function, refer to 6-2 Menus. ■ File Toolbar Icon Function New Open Save Export New Screen Open Screen Find Content Print About ■ Edit Toolbar Icon Function Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Delete 129 Section 6-3 Toolbars ■ Text Toolbar Icon Function Font size Font Aligns left Center Aligns right Aligns text top Center Vertical Aligns Bottom Font Color Bold Italic Underline ■ Bitmap Toolbar Icon 130 Function Description Select Transparent Color The sucker tool removes the color of the selected picture to specify the transparent color of the picture. Change Mode for Process All State Picture This icon stretches, resizes or aligns not only the current picture with current state but also all pictures with all states. Picture Stretch All This icon resizes the selected picture to fit it to the size of the object. Picture Stretch Ration 1: 1 This icon resizes the selected picture to fit it to the size of the object in proportion to the initial picture size. Picture Actual This icon resizes the selected picture to the initial picture size. Picture Align Left This icon aligns the selected picture to the left side of the object. Section 6-3 Toolbars Icon ■ Function Description Picture Align Horizontal This icon horizontally aligns the picture to the cenCenter ter of the object. Picture Align Right This icon aligns the selected object to the right side of the object. Picture Align Top This icon aligns the selected object to the top of the object. Picture Align Vertical Center This icon vertically aligns the picture to the center of the object. Picture Align Bottom This icon aligns the selected object to the bottom of the object. Object Toolbar Icon Function Button Analog Meter Level Meter Pipe Lamp Data Display Graph Display Input Curve Data Log Alarm Fixed Objects 131 Section 6-3 Toolbars ■ Build Toolbar Icon Function Current Object State View State OFF/0 View State ON/1 Display All Read/Write Address Previous windows Next windows Validation Transfer [To PT] Transfer Screen [To PT] Test ■ Layout Toolbar Icon Function Group Ungroup To Front To Bottom Forward one Backward one Align Left Align Right Align Top 132 Section 6-3 Toolbars Icon Function Align Bottom Center Vertically Center Horizontally Make same space horizontally Make same space vertically Make same width Make same height Make same size For details, refer to 6-2-2 Edit Menu. ■ Zoom Toolbar Icon Function Zoom level Zoom in Zoom out 133 Section 6-4 Object Functions 6-4 Object Functions The NP-Designer has many objects. You can use these objects to create screens. This section tells you how to select an object and the function of each object. 6-4-1 Selecting Object There are three methods to select objects when you edit the screen. To edit the screen, do one of these: • Right-click the mouse in the workspace. You will see a shortcut menu. Use the mouse to select an object. • Select one of the commands from the Objects Menu. • Select one of the objects from the Objects Toolbar. After you select an object, left-click and drag the mouse cursor on the workspace to create an object. See the illustration. Up to 1,024 objects can be created on one screen. Note 134 When inputting using overlapped objects, an input will be accepted only by the top object. Inputs will not be accepted by objects in the back. Section 6-4 Object Functions 6-4-2 Common Settings The settings common to all objects show below. Note Common Settings Label Label Size Font Label Color Some objects do not have these functions. Details You can set label, label size, font and label color on the object. Click the Font Detail Setting Dialog Box will show as below. button for Font. The The font option can set the font name, font size and ratio. This can also show the text format in the Preview window. If you use multi-language function, the Font Detail Setting Dialog Box shows different language tabs. Do the font setting in each language. Write Address Read Address Flicker Click the button for Write Address or Read Address in the Property. The Input Dialog Box is shown. Set the write address or read address. When the Read Address is set to None, the Read Address accesses to the same address as the Write Address. The Host can be Internal Memory or SERIALA. If the PT connects to different connections, the available host names will show in the Host drop-down list. After you select the Host and Type and input the address number, click Enter key. The object will record the input value. When you use Internal Memory as host, select the memory area from the Area Field: $ − Internal Address $M − Non-volatile Internal Address *$ − Indirect Address RCPNO − Data Block Number Address RCP − Data Block Address When the NULL is set in Comm. Tab of PT Setting Dialog box under PT Menu, only Internal Memory can be set as the host. When Yes is selected from Flicker Field, the object will flicker (blink). 135 Section 6-4 Object Functions Common Settings Details Picture Library Name 1. Select a picture of the object from the Picture Library Name Field. Picture Name 2. Click button for Picture Name to show the Select Picture Dialog Box below. 3. Double-click an image that you use. To import more than one picture into one object at the same time, press the Shift key and click the left mouse button at the same time. The selected pictures will be in each state of the object in sequence. If the number of the selected pictures is more than that of the object states, the system will import only the pictures of the same number of the states. The remaining pictures will not be imported. Note that NP-Designer does not save the Picture Library Name and Picture Name that you specified. When the project file is open again, the Picture Library Name will be “_LocalTempxx” and the Picture Name will be “HMIxx”. Transparency Effect Transparency Color Use the sucker tool to suck the transparent color of the picture. See the illustrations below for the transparent effect on the object. Before the transparent effect Push Time (s) User Security Level Set Low Security InterLock Address InterLock Level 136 After the transparent effect You can set the active time of the button between 0 and 10 seconds. When this option is enabled, the button will be active after you press the button longer than the setting time. This option can prevent operation errors. You can set the user security level between 0 and 7. (0 is default. 7 is the highest security Level.) When this option is enabled, the user can use only the objects whose security level is equal to or lower than the user's level. When this option is enabled, the security level will be the lowest after the button is pressed. This option can prevent operation errors. InterLock Address: An interlock can be set for accepting inputs for the object based on the status of the communications address. InterLock Level: • When Set to ON: Inputting is disabled when the InterLock Address is ON and enabled when it is OFF. • When Set to OFF: Inputting is disabled when the InterLock Address is OFF and enabled when it is ON. Section 6-4 Object Functions Common Settings ON Macro Refer to 6-5 Macro Function. OFF Macro Touch ON Macro Refer to 6-5 Macro Function. Refer to 6-5 Macro Function. Touch OFF Macro Trigger Trigger Mode Refer to 6-5 Macro Function. This function can turn the target PLC address to ON before or after the setting value is written. If it is necessary to turn to ON again, the user must set the address to be OFF manually. Border Color Background Color You can set the border color of the object. You can set the background color of the object. Foreground Color Fast Refresh You can set the foreground color of the object. Refer to Properties in 6-2-6 Screen Menu. 6-4-3 Details Button Objects Button Set Reset Macro Read Write Touch ON/ Touch OFF Touch ON/ Touch OFF Yes Yes Yes Yes Function This button can turn the setting address (Bit) to ON. The address will be always ON, if you release or press the button again. If there is an Touch ON Macro, the PT will execute it at the same time. This button can turn the setting address (Bit) to OFF. The address will be always OFF, if you release or press the button again. If there is an Touch OFF Macro, the PT will execute it at the same time. This button can turn the setting address (Bit) to ON while the button is pressed. When you press the button, the bit is turned ON and the Touch ON Macro is executed. When you release the button, the bit is turned OFF and the Touch OFF macro is executed. When you press the button, Touch ON Macro is executed if the bit is turned from OFF to ON or Touch OFF Macro is executed if the bit is turned from ON to OFF. Momentary Touch ON Touch OFF Yes Yes Alternative Touch ON Touch OFF Yes Yes N-State ON/ OFF Yes Yes There are 1 to 256 user-defined multi-states. This button can change its state by the read address. Assign Value ON/ OFF No Yes Assign Constant ON/ OFF No Yes When you press this button, the Numeric keypad Dialog Box will show on the screen. You can input the setting value directly. After you press ENTER key, the PT will transmit the input value to the setting address. This button will write the specified value into the setting address. 137 Section 6-4 Object Functions Button N-Increment N-Decrement Change Screen Back Screen Previous View Macro Read Write Function ON/ Yes Yes This button will add the setting address value to OFF the setting constant value and write the result to the setting address. ON/ Yes Yes This button will subtract the setting constant value OFF from the setting address value and write the result to the setting address. ON/ No No This button can show the screen you specified. OFF ON/ No No This button can show the previous screen. OFF ON/ No No This button can show the previous screen in an OFF order that the change screen button shows. TC Oper- No ation Command ■ No Yes This button can send commands to temperature controllers. General Buttons There are four types of general buttons: set button, reset button, momentary button and alternative button. When you press these buttons, the PT will transmit ON/OFF signal to the PLC. For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. Property of General Buttons Standard Raised Round Style Invisible You can set the button style. Function ■ You can change the function of the general buttons. You do not have to create a new object. N-State Button For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. Property of N-State Button The N-State button is a button that has more than one state. Data Length The data length can be bit, word or LSB. 138 Read Format The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. This option is available only when the data length is word. Add/ Remove State You can set the number of states of the object. The setting range will change by the data length. Word: 256 states LSB: 16 states Bit: 2 states Sequence You can set the sequence of the N-state object (previous state/next state). Section 6-4 Object Functions Example of N-State button: When the data length is LSB (from D100.0-D100.1 to D100.3-D100.4), NState button will change as below. S0=D100.0 ON S1=D100.1 ON S2=D100.2 ON S3=D100.3 ON S4=D100.4 ON ■ Assign Value Button For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. Property of Assign Value Button When you press this button on the screen, the numeric keypad (TEN-KEY) will show. Input the setting value and press ENTER key. The PT will send the value to the specified address. Detail Range Setup Data Length Data Format Minimum Maximum The data length can be word (16bits) or double word (32bits). You can select the data format from below: Word: BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal, binary. Double Word: BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal, hexadecimal, binary or float. You can set the minimum and maximum value of the input setting range. Integer Digits You can set the integer or fraction digits. The digit Fraction Digits number will be an actual digit number only when the data format is selected as float. Example of Assign Value Button: 139 Section 6-4 Object Functions Numeric keypad (TEN-KEY) dialog box: ■ Assign Constant Button For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. Property of Assign Constant Button When you press this button on the screen, the PT will send the value to the PLC address. This button has the same function as the assign value button has. Detail Range Setup Data Length Data Format Detail ■ The data length can be word (16 bits) or double word (32 bits). The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. You can enter the constant value to write in the address. N-Increment / N-Decrement Buttons For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. Property of N-Increment / N-Decrement Buttons When you press these buttons on the screen, the PT will read the value from the PLC address. The read value adds to or subtracts from the set constant value, and the PT will write the result into the address. When the user press the button, the PT will write the limit value (minimum or maximum) to the address, if the result is out of the limit. Function You can change the function of the N-Increment buttons and N-Decrement buttons. You do not have to create a new object. 140 Section 6-4 Object Functions Property of N-Increment / N-Decrement Buttons Detail Range Setup Data Length Data Format Jog Step Limit The data length can be word (16 bits) or double word (32 bits). The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. You can set the increment or decrement value. This will be the number to add or subtract when you press the buttons each time. You can set the maximum or minimum number of the increment or decrement value. Example of N-Increment / N-Decrement buttons: To adjust D1000 value, press +/− Buttons. 141 Section 6-4 Object Functions ■ Change Screen / Back Screen / Previous View Buttons For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. Property of Change Screen / Back Screen / Previous View Buttons These three buttons can change screens. • Change Screen: When you press this button on the screen, the PT will change the screen to the target screen. • Back Screen: When you press this button on the screen, the PT will change the screen to the previous screen. • Previous View: When you press this button on the screen, the PT will change to the previous view. These are the examples of screen changes. Change Screen Button: On Screen1, if you press the “Goto Screen2” button, Screen1 will change to Screen2. If you press the “Goto Screen3” button on Screen2, it will change to Screen3. Back Screen Button: If you press the “Back Screen” button on Screen3, the screen will change to Screen2 shown one screen before the active one. If you press the “Back Screen” button on Screen2, it will change to Screen3. Previous View Button: If you press the “Previous View” button on Screen2, it will change to Screen1. Function 142 You can change the function of the change screen, back screen, and previous view buttons. You do not have to create a new object. Section 6-4 Object Functions Property of Change Screen / Back Screen / Previous View Buttons Input Value Note This option is for the change screen button only. Close Pup-up You can select this check box only when the button is Screen placed on a pop-up screen. When you press this button on the pop-up screen, the PT will close that popup screen. User security When this option is enabled, the security level will be level will be set the lowest after the button is pressed. This option can to Low Security prevent operation errors. after changing the screen Goto Screen You can set a destination screen. Click this option to show the dialog box as below. When you select one of the screens from the left pane of the Dialog Box, the preview screen will show on the right pane. Note This option is for the change screen button only. ■ TC Operation Command For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. When EJ1 is specified as a protocol, the TC Operation Command button is available. For how to set the protocol, refer to Communication Tab in PT Setting Dialog Box of 6-2-4 PT Menu. The TC Operation Command buttons can send commands to temperature controllers. To specify the commands, use the Input Dialog Box of Write Address option. For details on each command, refer to the manual for temperature controller. 143 Section 6-4 Object Functions ■ System Function Button For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. Property of System Function Button Function You can change the function of the system function buttons. You do not have to create a new object. System Date & Time When you press this button on the screen, the PT will show the Date/Time Dialog Box. You can set year, month and date, hour, minute and second, and save them in the PT system. Password Table Setup When you press this button on the screen, PT will show the Password Table Dialog Box. You can only change and see the passwords that are the same or lower than your security level. If the setting level is higher than your security level, you cannot change and see the passwords. User security level 7 Enter Password 144 User security level 5 Even if you replace the screen data, the passwords in the Password Table will be the same. When you press this button on the screen, PT will show the Password Keypad Dialog Box. You can input a password to change your security level of PT. When you input a higher level password, you can access the higher level objects. Section 6-4 Object Functions Function Property of System Function Button Contrast When you press this button on the screen, the PT will &Brightness show the Adjust LCD Dialog Box. You can adjust LCD contrast and brightness settings of the PT. If you press the Set to Default LCD Button, the LCD settings will be default. If you press Put Contrast Center Button, the contrast adjustment bar will move to the middle. Low Security System Menu 6-4-4 The user security level will become the lowest level (Level 0). When you press this button on the screen, the PT will show the system menu. To return to the user screen, press the Exit Button on the system menu. Meter (1 to 3) For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. ■ Meter (1 to 3) Property of Meter (1 to 3) You can use the meter (1 to 3) to monitor whether the value of the address is more than the limit or not. Style Standard Raised Sunken 145 Section 6-4 Object Functions Property of Meter (1 to 3) Detail Data Length Data Format Minimum Value Maximum Value Target Value Color Range Variable target/range limits Integer Digits Fraction Digits 146 The data length can be word (16bits) or double word (32bits). The data format can be BCD, signed decimal or unsigned decimal. You can set the minimum and maximum value of the display. You can select the Target option to specify the target value and color. Thus the object will show the target value and the color that you set. See the illustration below. The target value is 60 and the color is blue. Refer to the Low Region Color and High Region Color of this property. If you select this option, Read Address+1 is the low limit, Read Address+2 is the high limit and Read Address+3 is the target value. You can set the integer and fraction digits for display. Low Region Color High Region Color You can set the low and high region color. These options are available only when you select the Ranges option in the Detail Dialog Box. See the illustration below. The low limit value is 30, the color of low region is green, the high limit value is 70, and the color of high region is red. Stitch Color You can set the stitch color. Section 6-4 Object Functions Scale Color Property of Meter (1 to 3) You can set the scale color. Scale Region You can set the scale region number. The setting range is between 1 Number and 10. 6-4-5 Meter (4 to 7) For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. Property of Meter (4 to 7) The meter (4 to 7) show the continuous changes of the specified address. Border Color Foreground Color Background Color Style You can set the border color, foreground and background color. See the illustration below. The border color is blue, the foreground color is green and the background color is yellow. Standard Raised Sunken Transparency Detail Data Length The data length can be word (16bits) or double word (32bits). Data Format The data format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. Minimum Value You can set the minimum and maximum value of the Maximum Value display. 147 Section 6-4 Object Functions Detail Target Value Color Property of Meter (4 to 7) You can select the Target option to specify the target value and color. Thus the object shows the target value and the color that you set. See the illustration below. The target value is 80 and the color is yellow. Range Low Region Color High Region Color Refer to the Low Region Color and High Region Color of this property. Variable target/ If you select this option, Read Address+1 is the low range limits limit, Read Address+2 is the high limit, and Read Address+3 is the target value. You can set the low and high region color. These options are available only when you select the Range option in the Detail Dialog Box. See the illustration below. The low range limit value is 30, the color of low region is green, the high range limit value is 70 and the color of high region is red. The minimum and maximum input value is 0 and 100 respectively. When the value is 20 6-4-6 When the value is 50 When the value is 80 Level Meter For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. ■ Level Meter Property of Level Meter The PT reads the value of the specified host address, and shows the value on the level meter. Foreground You can set the foreground and background color. Color See the illustration below. Background The foreground color is green and the background color is light yellow. Color Style Display Format 148 Standard Raised Sunken Left Right The display progressing direction is from right to left. The display progressing direction is from left to right. Top Bottom The display progressing direction is from bottom to top. The display progressing direction is from top to bottom. Section 6-4 Object Functions Property of Level Meter Value Value Data Length The data length can be word (16bits) or double word (32bits). Data Format The data format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. Minimum Value Maximum Value You can set the minimum and maximum value of the display. Target Value Color You can select the Target option to specify the target value and color. Thus the object will show the target value and the color that you set. See the illustration below. The target value is 50 and the color is red. The maximum and minimum value is 100 and 0 respectively. Range Refer to the Low Region Color and High Region Color of this property. If you select this option, Read Address+1 is the low limit value, Read Address+2 is the high limit value and Read Address+3 is the target value. Variable target/range limits Low Region Color High Region Color You can set the low and high region color. These options are available only when you select the Range option in the Detail Dialog Box. See the illustration below. The low limit value is 30, the color of low region is green, the high limit value is 70, and the color of high region is red. The minimum and maximum input values are 0 and 100 respectively. When the value is 20 When the value is 50 When the value is 80 149 Section 6-4 Object Functions ■ Deviation Object Property of Deviation Object The PT reads the value of the specified host address and subtracts the setting standard value from this read value to get a deviation value. Then, the PT shows this deviation value on the deviation object. Foreground You can set the foreground and background color. Color See the illustration below. Background The foreground color is green and the background color is light yellow. Color Style Display Format Standard Raised Sunken Horizontal The deviation value shows horizontally. Vertical The deviation value shows vertically. Value Data Length Data Format Standard Value Minimum Value Maximum Value You can set the minimum and maximum value of the display. Display Deviation Limit If you select this option, you can specify the deviation limit and color to show the deviation value in the color you specified. If you deselect this option, the deviation object shows the deviation value in the foreground color. You can set the limit value. Limit Color Variable Standard Value/Deviation Limit 150 The data length can be word (16bits) or double word (32bits). The data format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. You can set the standard value to calculate the deviation value. You can set the display color of the limit value. If you select this option, Read Address+1 is the standard value and Read Address+2 is the deviation limit value. Section 6-4 Object Functions Detail Property of Deviation Object Example: If the data length is word, the data format is unsigned decimal, the standard value is 50, the minimum value is 0, the maximum value is 100 and the deviation limit is 20, the deviation object will show as follows. When the value is 10 When the value is 70 6-4-7 When the value is 20 When the value is 90 Pipe For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. ■ Pipe (1) / Pipe (2) Property of Pipe (1) / Pipe (2) The PT reads the value of the specified host address, and shows the value on the pipe (1) / pipe (2). Water Mark Color Inside Tube Color Style You can set the watermark color and inside tube color. See the illustration below. Pipe (1) The Water Mark Color is blue. The Inside Tube Color is black. Standard Pipe (2) The Water Mark Color is red. The Inside Tube Color is white. Rotation 180 151 Section 6-4 Object Functions Property of Pipe (1) / Pipe (2) Detail Data Length The data length can be word (16bits) or double word (32bits). Data Format The data format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. Minimum Value You can set the minimum and maximum value of the Maximum Value pipe object. Detail Target Value Color You can select the Target option to specify the target value and color. Thus the object will show the target value and the color that you set. Range Refer to the Low Region Color and High Region Color of this property. This option is available only when you select the Target and Range Options. Read Address+1 is the low limit value, Read Address+2 is the high limit value and Read Address+3 is the target value. You can set the low and high region color. These options are available only when the Range option in the Detail Dialog Box is selected. See the illustration below. The low limit value is 30, the color of low region is green, the high limit value is 70 and the color of high region is red. The minimum and maximum input value is 0 and 100 respectively. Variable target/ range limits Low Region Color High Region Color When the value is 20 152 When the value is 50 When the value is 80 Section 6-4 Object Functions ■ Pipe (3) Property of Pipe (3) This object connects to several pipes. The pipe (3) shows as follows. Pipe Gauge ■ You can set the pipe gauge. The selectable range is between 1 and 5. 1 is 13 dots and 2 is 26 dots. The size for 3 to 5 increases progressively. Pipe (4) Property of Pipe (4) This object connects to several pipes. The pipe (4) shows as follows. Style Pipe Gauge ■ Standard Rotation 90 Rotation 180 Rotation 270 You can set the pipe gauge. The selectable range is between 1 and 5. 1 is 13 dots and 2 is 26 dots. The size for 3 to 5 increases progressively. Pipe (5) Property of Pipe (5) This object connects to several pipes. The pipe (5) shows as follows. Style Pipe Gauge Standard Rotation 90 Rotation 180 Rotation 270 You can set the pipe gauge. The selectable range is between 1 and 5. 1 is 13 dots and 2 is 26 dots. The size for 3 to 5 increases progressively. 153 Section 6-4 Object Functions ■ Pipe (6) / Pipe (7) Property of Pipe (6) / Pipe (7) The pipe (6) and (7) are horizontal and vertical pipes. The PT shows the direction of water flow by the change of the read address. Value of Read Address = 0 Value of Read Address = 1 Value of Read Address = 2 Pipe 6 Pipe 7 Mobile Cursor Color Pipe Gauge 6-4-8 You can set the mobile cursor color. The mobile cursor will show when there is any data occurred in the read address. You can set the pipe gauge. The range is between 1 and 5. 1 is 13 dots and 2 is 26 dots. The size for 3 to 5 increases progressively. Lamp For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. ■ N-State Lamp Property of N-State Lamp The N-state lamp is a lamp that has n states. Read Address Refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings for details on how to set the read address. When you set the read address with the contact of the host, the nstate lamp will change with the state (ON or OFF) of the host contact. For example, you can set the state settings of the n-state lamp to show the text “Start” when the value is 1 and to show the text “Stop” when the value is 0. You can also add a picture to each state to show a different picture for each state. Style Data Length 154 Standard Raised Round The data length can be bit, word or LSB. Invisible Section 6-4 Object Functions Read Format Add/Remove State Property of N-State Lamp The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. This option is available only when the data length is word. You can set the number of states of the object. The setting range will change by the data length. Word: 256 states LSB: 16 states Bit: 2 states Example of n-state lamps: ■ Range Lamp Property of Range Lamp The range lamp shows the state of specified address in the data length. Style Standard Raised Round Invisible Add/Remove You can set the number of states of the object. The setting range will State change by the data length. Word: 256 states Detail 155 Section 6-4 Object Functions Detail Data Length Property of Range Lamp The data length can be word (16bits) or double word (32bits). Data Format The data format can be BCD, signed decimal or unsigned decimal. Range Variable Limits When n is the total number of states, n will also be the total number of ranges. You can use addresses to specify the lower limit of each range. For example, If the read address is $0, and the total number of states is 5, you can use range 0 to 4. The lower limit value of range 0 is $1, the lower limit value of range 1 is $2. For the range 2 and greater the address increases progressively. Constant Limits When n is the total number of states, n will also be the total number of ranges. You can specify the limit of each range. For example, when the number of states is 5, the number of ranges will be 5 (0 to 4). You can specify the foreground color of state 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 as red, green, blue, yellow and purple, respectively. Range 0 Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 100 50 33 1 0 The below shows the relationships between the value of the read address and the range lamp color. Value of Read Address ■ Range Lamp Color 100 and more 50 to 99 Red Green 33 to 49 1 to 32 Blue Yellow 0 and less Purple Simple Lamp Property of Simple Lamp The simple lamp has two states (ON/OFF). Thus, it is possible to emphasize some display parts of the screen. In the example below, there are simple lamps on the pipes. The simple lamps will change as shown on the right figure below. XOR Color Precautions for Correct Use 156 You can set XOR color of base picture. When an object is positioned in the behind a simple lamp, the object in back will not be refreshed while the simple lamp is illuminated, even if the object display changes. Section 6-4 Object Functions 6-4-9 Data Display Object For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. ■ Numeric Display Object Property of Numeric Display Object The numeric display object reads the value of the setting address, and shows the read value in the format that you set. Label Size You can set the label size and label color. The label size can be Label Color between 8 and 64. Style Standard Raised Sunken Transparency Leading Zero You can add or remove the leading zero to each value. The integral digits are set to 4. When YES is selected When NO is selected Detail Data Length The data length can be word (16bits) or double word (32bits). Data Format You can set any of the data formats below. Word: BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal, hexadecimal or binary. Double Word: BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal, hexadecimal, binary or float. You can set the integral and fraction digits. The digit numbers will be an actual digit number only when the data format is selected as Float. Integral Digits Fraction Digits 157 Section 6-4 Object Functions Detail ■ Property of Numeric Display Object Gain (a) You can gain and offset the display numeric value (y) by the equation y = (a) x (read address value) Offset (b) + (b). For example, if Gain value (a) is 2, Offset value (b) is 3 and the read address value is 4, then the display numeric value will be 2 x 4 + 3 = 11. Round off If you select this option, the result (y) of the equation above can be rounded off. String Display Object Property of String Display Object This string display object reads the value of the specified address, and converts it to text to show it on the screen. The value of read address must be set in ASCII format. Read Address Refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. Label Size Label Color Style You can set the label size and label color. The label size can be between 8 and 64. Standard Raised Sunken Transparency Characters Length The characters length can be between 1 and 28 characters. For example, if the read address is $0, the characters length is 2 and the value at $0 is set as follows, the above screen will show. $0 = 4142H ■ Date Display Object Property of Date Display Object The date display object shows the PT system date. Label Size You can set the label size and label color. The label size can be between 8 and 64. Label Color Style Refer to the Property of Numeric Display Object. Date Format ■ MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, DD.MM.YY, YY/MM/DD Time Display Object Property of Time Display Object The time display object shows the PT system time. Label Size You can set the label size and label color. The label size can be between 8 and 64. Label Color Style Refer to the Property of Numeric Display Object. Time Format 158 HH:MM:SS, HH:MM Section 6-4 Object Functions ■ Week Display Object Property of Week Display Object The week display object shows the day (Sunday to Monday) of the week. The state default setting is 0 (0: SUN to 6: SAT). Each state has its predefined day description, such as SUN, MON ... SAT. You can change it in the property. Style Refer to the Property of Numeric Display Object. ■ Message Bank Object Property of Message Bank Object The message bank object shows the state content of the specified host contact or address. Style Refer to the Property of Numeric Display Object. ■ Data Type Read Format The data type can be bit, word or LSB. The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. This option is available only when the data length is word. Add/Remove State You can set the number of states of the object. The setting range will change by the data length. Bit: 2 states Word: 256 states LSB: 16 states Banner Object Property of Banner Object The banner object moves, lights and shows in the way you set, and shows the state content of specified host contact or address. Style Refer to the Property of Numeric Display Object. Data Length Read Format Add/Remove State Direction The data length can be bit, word or LSB. The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. This option is available only when the data length is word. You can set the number of states of the object. The setting range will change by the data length. Word: 256 states LSB: 16 states Bit: 2 states Left The display progressing direction is from right to left. Right Top Movement Distance Interval (ms) The display progressing direction is from left to right. The display progressing direction is from bottom to top. Bottom The display progressing direction is from top to bottom. You can set the movement distance of the message. The range is between 1 and 50 dots. You can set the time interval between movements. The range is between 50 and 3000 ms. 6-4-10 Draw Objects 159 Section 6-4 Object Functions For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. ■ State Image Object Property of State Image Object You can use this object to show one or more states on the specified position of the PT screen. Each state can show a different picture. Data Length Read Format Add/Remove State Auto Change The data length can be bit, word or LSB. The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. This option is available only when the data length is word. You can set the number of states of the object. The setting range will change by the data length. Bit: 2 states Word: 256 states LSB: 16 states No The value of read address sets the state number. Yes When the value of read address is 1 or more, the object will change automatically. When the value of read address is 0, the state will not change automatically. Variation Read Address+1 1 or more: The states will change automatically. 0: The states will not change automatically. Change Rate (ms) You can set the automatic change interval of the states. The change rate is between 100 and 3000 ms. Transparency Effect Transparency Color Foreground Color Transparency If you select Yes, the transparent color specified in the object will be invisible. This option comes with the Transparency Color setting of the object. See the illustrations: Transparency Effect is No. Transparency Color is disabled. Foreground color transparency is Yes. Transparency Effect and Transparency is Yes. The object becomes transparent. Example of state image objects: The read address = D100. The relation between the Internal Memory value and each state shows below: 160 Section 6-4 Object Functions D100=1 D100=2 D100=3 D100=4 ■ Animated Object Property of Animated Object You can move and show the animated object on the screen by control of horizontal and vertical axes position. A different picture can show for each state. Read Address Refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings for how to set read address. Read Address The value of Read Address is the state of the animated object. Read Address+1 The value of Read Address+1 is the horizontal axis position. Read Address+2 The value of Read Address+2 is the vertical axis position. Clear Picture You can clear the previous animated object when the object moves or the state of the object changes. Data Length Read Format The data length can be word or LSB. The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. This option is available only when the data length is word. You can set the number of states of the object. The setting range will change by the data length. Word: 256 states LSB: 16 states Add/Remove State 161 Section 6-4 Object Functions ■ Variable Line Object Property of Variable Line Object You can change the color, shape and display position of the variable line object by the value of the read address. Read Refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings for how to set read address. Address Variable Position Yes No Read Address Horizontal axis position of the start point Color /Flicker (see note) Read Address+1 Vertical axis position of the start point Flicker (see note) Read Address+2 Read Address+3 Horizontal axis position of the end point Vertical axis position of the end point Read Address+4 Read Address+5 Color /Flicker (see note) Flicker (see note) Note When you set Variable Color and Flicker to Yes, the address will be used for the variable color. The next address will be used for controlling the flicker. 162 Color Width You can set the display color of the variable line object. The line width can be between 1 and 8 dots. Read Format Line Style The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. You can select the line style from below. Variable Position Refer to the Read Address of this property. Variable Color Flicker Refer to the Read Address of this property. This option can flicker the object when the address that controls the flicker is ON. Section 6-4 Object Functions ■ Variable Rectangle Object Property of Variable Rectangle Object You can change the color, shape and display position of the variable rectangle object by the value of the read address. Read Address Refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings for how to set read address. When you set Variable Position to Yes: Variable Size Read Address Yes Horizontal axis position of the top left Vertical axis position of the top left No Horizontal axis position of the top left Vertical axis position of the top left Read Address+2 Object width Color /Flicker (see note) Read Address+3 Read Address+4 Object height Color /Flicker (see note) Flicker (see note) Flicker (see note) Read Address+1 Read Address+5 When you set Variable Position to No: Variable Size Yes No Read Address Horizontal radius Color /Flicker (see note) Read Address+1 Read Address+2 Vertical radius Color /Flicker (see note) Flicker (see note) Flicker (see note) Read Address+3 Note When you set Variable Color and Flicker to Yes, the address will be used for the variable color. The next address will be used for controlling the flicker. Width Read Format The border line can be between 1 and 8 dots. The read format can be from BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. Transparency When you enable this option, only the object border will show and there is no color in the object. This will also disable the Foreground Color option. Corner You can use the bevel size setting for the radius to round the corners. Radius (The maximum setting value can change when the size of the object changes.) 163 Section 6-4 Object Functions Property of Variable Rectangle Object Variable Posi- Refer to the Read Address of this property. tion Variable Size Refer to the Read Address of this property. Variable Color Refer to the Read Address of this property. Flicker ■ This option can flicker the object when the address that controls the flicker is ON. Variable Ellipse Object Property of Variable Ellipse Object You can change the color, shape and display position of variable ellipse object by the value of the read address. Read Address Refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings for how to set Read Address. When you set Variable Center Point to Yes: Variable Size Read Address Read Address+2 Yes Horizontal axis position of the center point Vertical axis position of the center point Horizontal radius Read Address+3 Vertical radius Read Address+4 Color /Flicker (see note) Flicker (see note) Read Address+1 Read Address+5 No Horizontal axis position of the center point Vertical axis position of the center point Color /Flicker (see note) Flicker (see note) When you set Variable Center Point to No: Variable Size Read Address Yes Horizontal radius No Color /Flicker (see note) Read Address+1 Read Address+2 Vertical radius Color /Flicker (see note) Flicker (see note) Read Address+3 Read Address+3 Color Width Read Format 164 Note When you set Variable Color and Flicker to Yes, the address will be used for the variable color. The next address will be used for controlling the flicker. You can set the display color of the variable ellipse object. The line width can be between 1 and 8 dots. The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. Section 6-4 Object Functions Property of Variable Ellipse Object Transparency When you enable this option, only the object border will show and there is no color in the object. This will also disable the Foreground Color option. Variable Cen- Refer to the Read Address of this property. ter Point Variable Size Refer to the Read Address of this property. Variable Color Refer to the Read Address of this property. Flicker This option can flicker the object when the address that controls the flicker is ON. 6-4-11 Input Objects You can input a value or string in a specified address. For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. ■ Numeric Input Object Property of Numeric Input Object You can input the setting value directly on the screen. Press the object on the screen. A numeric keypad (TEN-KEY) will show. Input a setting value and press ENTER on a keypad. The PT will send the input setting value to the set address. Label Size Label Color Style Leading Zero You can set the label size and label color. The label size can be between 8 and 64 pixels. Standard Raised Sunken Transparency You can add or remove the leading zero to each value. The integral digits below are set to 4. (When YES is selected) (When NO is selected) 165 Section 6-4 Object Functions Property of Numeric Input Object Detail Data Length The data length can be word (16bits) or double word (32bits). Data Format You can select the data format from below: Word: BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal, hexadecimal, binary Double Word: BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal, hexadecimal, binary, float Minimum Maximum You can set the minimum and maximum value of the input setting range. These options executes the check of minimum and maximum values before the values are converted to the set gain and offset. You can set the integer or fraction digits. The digit number will be an actual digit number only when the data format is selected as Float. When this option is selected, the Read Address+1 is the minimum value. Read Address+2 is the maximum value. Integer Digits Fraction Digits Variable Minimum/Maximum Value Detail Display Asterisk (*) ■ Gain (a) Offset (b) You can gain and offset the display numeric value (y) by the equation y = (a) x (Read Address value) + (b). For example, if Gain value (a) is 2, Offset value (b) is 3, and the read address value is 4, the display numeric value will be 2 x 4 + 3 = 11. Round off If you select this option, the result (y) of the equation above can be rounded off. If you select YES, the screen will show asterisks when you input values. String Input Object Property of String Input Object Press a string input object to show a dialog box for inputting a string. This object writes the input string to the write address. The string is input or shown only ASCII format. Label Size You can set the label size and label color. The label size can be between Label Color 8 and 64 points. Style 166 Standard Raised Sunken Transparency Section 6-4 Object Functions Characters Length Property of String Input Object The character length can be between 1 and 28 characters. The default setting is 4 characters. Display Asterisk (*) If you select YES, the screen will show asterisks when you input characters. 6-4-12 Line Graph Objects Refer to the 6-4-2 Common Settings on functions common to all objects. ■ Broken-Line Object Property of Broken-Line Object This object can show a broken-line chart of the read address values. Set the Line Number (1 to 4) in the property. Then click Value − Detail... to show the Line Setting Dialog Box, and set the Broken-Line chart setting. Example: If the Sample Number is 100 and Line Number is 4, the object will read the data of 100 X 4 = 400 words. When the Read Address is D0, the object will read from D0 to D399. See the Read Address allocation below. Line 1: D0 to D99 Line 2: D100 to D199 Line 3: D200 to D299 Line 4: D300 to D399 You must set the sample flag of the control block to read data and display the brokenline charts. Refer to the 6-6 Control Block and Status Block. Style Line Number Standard Raised Sunken The line number can be between 1 and 4 lines. 167 Section 6-4 Object Functions Property of Broken-Line Object Value Sample Number Max. Sample Number When the Sample Number is a constant, the Max. Sample Number option is disabled. The Max. Sample Number is specified as below: • When the object style is Standard, the Max. Sample Number is the object width and the unit is dots. • When the object style is Raised or Sunken, the Max. Sample Number is the object width minus the border widths (the border size is always 7 dots). See the illustration below for the border widths. When the sample number is a variable value, the read address will be the sample number. If the variable value is more than the Max. Sample Number, the value will not exceed the Max. Sample Number that you set. Read Format Sample Flag Minimum Maximum 168 The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. You can select the number of the sample flag address. When the sample flag bit is ON, the data will be read and drawn. When the clear flag bit is ON, the graph will be cleared. The sample flag address is in the control block. Refer to 6-6 Control Block and Status Block. Width You can set the minimum and maximum value of the graph. If the value is more than the maximum value, the line will show the maximum value. If the value is less than the minimum value, the line will show the minimum value. The line width can be between 1 and 8 dots. Color You can set the line color. Section 6-4 Object Functions Grid Color Partition Number ■ Property of Broken-Line Object The illustration below shows that the Grid Color is red and the Partition Number is 3. X-Y Distribution Object Property of X-Y Distribution Object This object can show X and Y axes chart of the read address values. Set the Line Number (1 to 4) in the property. Then click Detail − Detail... to show the Line Setting Dialog Box, and set the X-Y distribution chart setting. Example: If the Sample Number is 100 and Line Number is 4, the object will use 100 X 4 X2= 800 words. When the Read Address of X axis is D0 and Y axis is D500, the object will read from D0 to D399 and from D500 to D899. See the Read Address allocation below. Line 1: X is D0 to D99, Y is D500 to D599 Line 2: X is D100 to 199, Y is D600 to D699 Line 3: X is D200 to D299, Y is D700 to D799 Line 4: X is D300 to D399, Y is D800 to D899 You must set the sample flag of the control block to read data and display the X-Y distribution. Refer to 6-6 Control Block and Status Block. Style Standard Raised Sunken Connect Two Points When you select Yes, a straight line will connect each two points. Line Number The line number can be between 1 and 4 lines. Detail 169 Section 6-4 Object Functions Detail Property of X-Y Distribution Object Sample Number When the Sample Number is a constant, the Max. Sample Number Max. Sample Number option is disabled. The Max. Sample Number is specified as below: • When the object style is Standard, the Max. Sample Number is the object width and the unit is dots. • When the object style is Raised or Sunken, the Max. Sample Number is the object width minus the border widths (the border size is always 7 dots). See the illustration below for the border widths. Data Format Horiz. Read Address Grid Color Horiz. Line Number Vert. Line Number When the sample number is a variable value, the read address will be the sample number. If the variable value is more than the Max. Sample Number, the value will not exceed the Max. Sample Number that you set. The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. You can set the read address of the horizontal (X) axis position. Vert. Read Address You can set the read address of the vertical (Y) axis position. Sample Flag Horiz. Minimum Horiz. Maximum You can select the number of the sample flag address. When the sample flag bit is ON, the data will be read and drawn. When the clear flag bit is ON, the graph will be cleared. The sample flag address is in the control block. Refer to 6-6 Control Block and Status Block. You can set the minimum and maximum value of the horizontal (X) axis. Vert. Minimum Vert. Maximum You can set the minimum and maximum value of the vertical (Y) axis. Width You can set the line width. The line width can be between 1 and 8 dots. Color You can set the line color. The illustration below shows that the Grid Color is red and the both of Horizontal Line Number and Vertical Line Number are 2. 6-4-13 Data Log Objects The data log objects can show data logs in graph and table formats. You must use this object with Data Log Setting. Refer to 6-2-4 PT Menu for the setting. Refer to the 6-4-2 Common Settings on functions common to all objects. 170 Section 6-4 Object Functions ■ Trend Chart Object Property of Trend Chart Object The trend chart object can show data logs. Line Number Value The line number can be between 1 and 8 lines. Logging Buffer You can select the data log buffer number. The number is the same as the line number of Data Log Setting Dialog Box. Data Format The data format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal, hexadecimal or float. The data length is word. When you select Float, you must set more than 2 words in the Data Length Field of Data Log Setting Dialog Box. Minimum Maximum You can set the minimum and maximum value of the trend chart. If the value is more than the maximum value, the line will show the maximum value. If the value is less than the minimum value, the line will show the minimum value. Integral Digits Fraction Digits You can set the integer or fraction digits. The digit number will be an actual digit number only when the data format is selected as Float. Data Log Buffer Setup Click the Data Log Buffer Setup Button to open the Data Log Setting Dialog Box. You can also select PT Menu − Data Log Setting. Time Format Time/Date The time format can be HH:MM:SS or HH:MM. 171 Section 6-4 Object Functions Value Property of Trend Chart Object Date Format The date format can be MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY or DD.MM.YY. Color You can set the text color of time and date. This option will be enabled when the Time Format or Date Format is selected. Curve (No.1 ~ 8) Enable If this option is selected, you can enable the line options. You must set the data number to read the data log. For example, if the Data Length option in the Data Log Setting Dialog Box is 3 words, you can select the Data No. from 0 to 2. When you select 1, the line 1 reads the value of the Read Address+1. Data No. Note If the data format is Float and the number of the Data Length is an odd number, you must select an even number as the Data No. Width Color Grid Color Partition Number The line width can be between 1 and 8 dots. You can set the line color. The illustration below shows that the grid color is red and the Partition Number is 3. Example of data log trend chart object: 172 Section 6-4 Object Functions ■ Data Log Table Object Property of Data Log Table Object The data log table object can show data logs in table format. When you input the read address in the Data Log Setting Dialog Box, the data length must be between 1 and 8 words. The Data No. of each Data Tab in the Data Log Detail Dialog Box will change with this value. For example, if the value of Data Length is 5, the Data No. selection will also be 5. Column Value The number of the display data items can be between 1 and 8. Logging Buffer You can select the data log buffer number. The number is the same as the line number of Data Log Setting Dialog Box. Data Log Buffer Setup Click the Data Log Buffer Setup Button to open the Data Log Setting Dialog Box. You can also select PT Menu − Data Log Setting... Time/Date Time Format Date Format The time format can be HH:MM:SS or HH:MM. The date format can be MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY or DD.MM.YY. Color You can set the text color of time and date. This option will be enabled when the Time Format or Date Format is selected. Data (No. 1 to 8) Data Length The data length can be word (16bits) or double word (32bits). The data format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal, hexadecimal or float. Data Format 173 Section 6-4 Object Functions Value Property of Data Log Table Object Data No. You must set the data number to read the data log. For example, if the Data Length option in the Data Log Setting Dialog Box is 3 words, you can select the Data No. from 0 to 2. When you select 1, the line 1 reads the value of the Read Address+1. Color Note If the data format is Float and the number of the Data Length is an odd number, you must select an even number as the Data No. You can set the display text color of the data. Integer Digits Fraction Digits You can set the integer or fraction digits. The digit number will be an actual digit number only when the data format is selected as Float. Leading Zero You can add or remove the leading zero to each value. For example, when Leading Zero option is enabled and the integral digits are set to 4, the display value will be 0001 instead of 1. Example of data log table object: ■ Event Log Table Object Property of Event Log Table Object The event log table object can show the event logs in table format. When the state changes, the specified message also changes. Data Length The data length can be word or LSB. Read Format Add/Remove State 174 The read format can be BCD, signed decimal, unsigned decimal or hexadecimal. This option is available only when the data length is word. You can set the number of states of the object. The setting range will change by the data length. Word: 256 states LSB: 16 states Section 6-4 Object Functions Property of Event Log Table Object Detail Logging Buffer Data No. Data Log Buffer Setup Time/Date Time Format You can select the data log buffer number. The number is the same as the line number of Data Log Setting Dialog Box. You must set the data number to read the event log. For example, if the Data Length option in the Data Log Setting Dialog Box is 3 words, the Data No. can be between 0 and 2. When you select 1, the object reads the value of the Read Address+1. Click the Data Log Buffer Setup Button to open the Data Log Setting Dialog Box. You can also select PT Menu − Data Log Setting... The time format can be HH:MM:SS or HH:MM. Date Format The date format can be MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/ YY or DD.MM.YY. Color You can set the text color of Time/Date. This option will be enabled when the Time Format or Date Format is selected. Example of event log table object: 1. D1000=0 2. D1000=1 3. D1000=2 4. D1000=3 5. D1000=4 6. D1000=5 7. D1000=6 175 Section 6-4 Object Functions 6-4-14 Alarm Objects The alarm objects can show the alarm messages in table format. You must use these objects with Alarm Setting. Refer to 6-2-4 PT Menu for the setting. For details on functions common to all objects, refer to 6-4-2 Common Settings. ■ History List Object Property of History List Object The generate history/cancel history for the set alarm will be displayed in chronological order in list format. The generate history items will be shown with O’s and the cancel history items will be shown with X’s. Detail Time Format The time format can be HH:MM:SS or HH:MM. Date Format The date format can be from MM/DD/YY, DD/ MM/YY or DD.MM.YY. This option can show the alarm number in the history list object. The alarm number will always be in front of the alarm message. The Alarm Number will be set in the Alarm Setting Dialog Box. You can set the text color of time and date. This option will be active when the Time Format or Date Format is selected. Alarm Number Color Example of history list object 176 Section 6-4 Object Functions 1. Alarm No. 001 occurred at August 31, 2007 09:04:07 2. Alarm No. 002 occurred at August 31, 2007 09:05:40 3. Alarm No. 001 released at August 31, 2007 09:06:29 ■ Latest List Object Property of Latest List Object The present alarms will be shown in list format. Detail ■ Time Format Date Format The time format can be HH:MM:SS or HH:MM. The date format can be from MM/DD/YY, DD/ MM/YY or DD.MM.YY. Color You can set the text color of time and date. This option will be active when the Time Format or Date Format is selected. Frequency List Object Property of Frequency List Object The alarm ON frequency (number of alarms) will be shown in the order of the alarms, in list format. Detail Time Format The time format can be HH:MM:SS or HH:MM. 177 Section 6-4 Object Functions Detail ■ Property of Frequency List Object Date Format The date format can be from MM/DD/YY, DD/ MM/YY or DD.MM.YY. Alarm Number This option can show the alarm number in the frequency list object. The alarm number will always be in front of the alarm message. The Alarm Number will be set in the Alarm Setting Dialog Box. Display for Counting Zero Too If this option is selected, the alarm frequency list object will show the message when the alarm message occurrence is zero. Color You can set the text color of time and date. This option will be active when the Time Format or Date Format is selected. Message Banner Object Property of Message Banner Object The present alarms will be shown in a single line of scrolling text. Style Standard Raised Sunken Transparency Movement Distance You can set the movement distance of the banner. The range can be between 1 and 50 dots. Interval (ms) The interval time of the movement distance can be between 50 and 3000 ms. Value Time Format Date Format The time format can be HH:MM:SS or HH:MM. The date format can be from MM/DD/YY, DD/ MM/YY or DD.MM.YY. Alarm Number This option can show the alarm number in the message banner object. The alarm number will always be in front of the alarm message. The Alarm Number will be set in the Alarm Setting Dialog Box. Color You can set the text color of time and date. This option will be active when the Time Format or Date Format is selected. 178 Section 6-4 Object Functions 6-4-15 Fixed Objects The users can make many graphics objects by use of the fixed objects. Refer to the 6-4-2 Common Settings on functions common to all objects. ■ Line Object Property of Line Object You can draw line objects. Line direction ■ Line width (1 to 8) Line Color You can set the line color of the object. Line Width Line Style The line width can be between 1 and 8 dots. You can select the line styles from below. Rectangle Object Property of Rectangle Object You can draw rectangle objects. Line Color You can set the line color of the object. Line Width Transparency The line width can be between 1 and 8 dots. When you enable this option, only the object border will show and there is no color in the object. This will also disable the Foreground Color option. Corner Radius You can use the bevel size setting for the radius to round the corners. (The maximum setting value can change when the size of the object changes.) 179 Section 6-4 Object Functions ■ Circle Object Property of Circle Object You can draw circle objects. Line Color Line Width You can set the line color of the object. The line width can be between 1 and 8 dots. Transparency The outside area of a circle is always in transparent color. When you select Yes, the foreground color will be in transparent color and the object will show the border line only. If there are other objects below this object, they will show up and can be viewed on the screen. See the illustrations below. Transparency option is No Transparency option is Yes ■ Polygon Object Property of Polygon Object You can draw polygon objects. Line Color Foreground Color Line Width Transparency You can set the line color of the object. You can set the display color of the object. See the illustrations below. The foreground color is blue. The foreground color is light blue. The line width can be between 1 and 8 dots. The outside area of a polygon is always in transparent color. When you select Yes, the foreground color will be in transparent color and the object will show only with the border line. This option will also disable the Foreground Color option. If there are other objects below this object, they will show up and can be viewed on the screen. See the illustrations below. Transparency option is No. Transparency option is Yes. 180 Section 6-4 Object Functions ■ Sectors Object Property of Sectors Object You can draw sectors objects. Line Color Line Width You can set the line color of the object. The line width can be between 1 and 8 dots. Arc When you select Yes, the object will become an arc. This option will also disable the Foreground Color option. When you select No, the object will become a sector. Arc option is No. ■ Arc option is Yes Text Object Property of Sectors Object You can draw text objects. Label Size The label size can be between 8 and 64. ■ Foreground Color Label Color You can set the color of the text frame and label color. See the illustration below. The Foreground Color is blue. The Label Color is white. Transparency When you select Yes, the foreground color will be in transparent color and the object will show the label text only. This option will also disable the Foreground Color option. Scale Object Property of Scale Object You can draw scale objects. Label Size You can set the label size and label color. Label Color The label size can be between 8 and 64. Style Standard Rotation 90 Rotation 180 Label Display This option can show the label display next to the scale. Main Scale See the illustrations below. The main scale is 2. Rotation 270 The main scale is 3. 181 Section 6-4 Object Functions Property of Scale Object Value Data Length Date Format The data length can be word (16bits) or double word (32bits). The data format can be BCD, signed decimal or unsigned decimal. Minimum Maximum You can set the minimum and maximum values of the scale range. Integer Digits Fraction Digits You can set the integer and fraction digits. Scale Color You can set the scale color of the object. Sub Scale See the illustrations below. Number The main scale number is 3. The sub scale number is 1. ■ The main scale number is 3. The sub scale number is 2. Table Object Property of Table Object You can draw table objects. Detail Setup Header Row Header Col. Header 182 This option can set the color of the first row of the table. This option can set the color of the first column of the table. Section 6-4 Object Functions Detail Setup Grid Color Number of Rows Number of Columns Interlacing Property of Table Object Rows This option can set the color of the interlacing rows of the table. Columns This option can set the color of the interlacing columns of the table. Row Header This option can set the color of the interlacing row header of the table. Columns Header Cell Setting Sep. Rows Evenly Sep. Col Evenly You can set the grid color. This option can set the color of the interlacing column header of the table. You can distribute the rows of the table evenly. You can distribute the columns of the table evenly. The number of rows can be between 1 and 99 rows. The number of columns can be between 1 and 99 columns. 183 Section 6-5 Macro Function 6-5 6-5-1 Macro Function Macro Types Macro is the function executed by a basic program. With this Macro function, the NP-series PTs can process screen display or data, which were processed on hosts. Thus, the load on hosts decreases. To make sure that Macro is correct, you can use Test function on a computer to do a Macro test. ■ Macro Types Macro Set with Project Macro Set with Screen Macro Startup Macro Description The PT executes the Startup Macro only one time when the PT status up. Project Resident Macro The PT executes the Project Resident Macro again and again when the PT starts up. Project Periodic Macro The PT executes the Project Periodic Macro at the specified interval while the PT operates. Start Macro The PT executes Start Macro to show screens. The PT draws objects on the screen after the PT executes this macro. End Macro Screen Periodic Macro Macro Set with Object (Button) ON Macro OFF Macro Touch ON Macro Touch OFF Macro Other ■ Submacro The PT executes End Macro to close screens. If you use this macro to switch screens, the PT executes the Start Macro for the destination screen only after the PT executes the End Macro for the current screen. The PT executes the Screen Periodic Macro at the specified interval while the PT shows screens. The PT executes the ON Macro only one time to turn ON a bit of an object. The PT executes the OFF Macro only one time to turn OFF a bit of an object. The PT executes the Touch ON Macro the instant the user press the object. The PT executes the Touch OFF Macro the instant the user press the object. The Sub-macro is a subroutine. It is possible to: • Call the Sub-macro from each macro, • Register 512 Sub-macros in one project, and • Give a name. Restrictions • Each macro can have a maximum of 512 lines. • Each line can have a maximum of 128 bytes. • Make sure that infinite loops do not occur. (Example: You cannot stop a program). • Variables cannot be used to specify addresses within macros. 184 Section 6-5 Macro Function ■ Sub-macro To comment each macro, you can use the Sub-macro function. Thus the management, maintenance and operation are easy. The initial name of all sub-macros is Submacro (n) (n = 1 to 512). The left field shows the Sub-macro numbers. To use the Sub-macro, you can write “CALL n (n = 1 to 512)”. 6-5-2 Editing Macro 1. Selecting Macro Commands 1,2,3... 1. Select a macro from the menu bar or property. The macro editing window shows. 2. Click the Macro Wizard Icon. The Macro Command Dialog Box shows. 3. Click the Command Button or Command Menu in the Macro Command Dialog Box. 4. Select a command. 5. Edit a macro. 185 Section 6-5 Macro Function 2. Macro Editing Window and Macro Command Dialog Box 1,2,3... 1. Macro Editing Window Note Toolbar of Macro Editing Window The number on the left is the line number. • Import Macro This command imports macro files. You can reuse these files when you connect to different hosts. This decreases the time to edit macros. To open a macro file, click the Import Macro icon. You can see this dialog box. • Export Macro This command saves created macro files. It is possible to give a new name to tell the difference between the new file and others. 186 Section 6-5 Macro Function • Update Macro This function updates macros. • Cut This command cuts macros. • Copy This command copies macros. • Paste This command pastes macros. • Syntax Check This function makes sure that the macro syntax is correct. • Macro Wizard This command shows the Macro Command Dialog Box. You can use this dialog box to edit macro. The macro commands are put in brackets when you use host addresses. This tells you the difference between the commands and the Internal Memory. 187 Section 6-5 Macro Function 2. Macro Command Dialog Box ■ Macro Command Dialog Box • Previous This command moves up the selected line by one line. The above lines will also move up by one line. • Next This command moves down the selected line by one line. The lines below will also move down by one line. • Update This function updates the macro. If you do not use this function after you edit a macro, changes are not updated. With this function, you can know if it is necessary to change the macro or not. If the macro is not updated, you need to edit the macro again. • Insert This command inserts a macro between two lines. The lines below will move down by one line. • Delete This command deletes the selected line. The lines below will move up by one line. • Comment To write comments in programs, you can put the sharp symbol (#) in front of sentences. The sentences from the sharp symbol to the end are comments. • Input field You can use keys to edit macro in the input field. To edit the macro, 1. Input macros in the input field. 188 Section 6-5 Macro Function 2. Update the macros, or click the Enter key. The NP-Designer changes the macro to a correct format. If there is an error, a warning dialog box shows. There is no limit in spaces between operand and operation symbol. • Command To edit macro, you can use the commands. To use commands and equations, • Input directly. • Select from the menu or Command Button. Macro Operation ■ ■ Definition BYTE 8-bit data. You can use it to show 00 to FF of hexadecimal system. WORD 16-bit data. Word is made up of continuous 2 bytes. For example b15 to b0. You can use it to show 0000 to FFFF of hexadecimal system. DWORD, DW 32-bit data. Double word is made up of continuous 2 words. For example b31 to b0. You can use it to show 00000000 to FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal system. Signed A signed value is a numeric value with polarity. You will usually see a 'plus' sign in front of a positive number, and a 'minus' sign in front of a negative number. Arithmetic Operation There are two Arithmetic Operations, which include Integer Operation and Float Operation. Each operand can be the internal memory or constant. The operands that store output results must be the internal memory. For details, refer to this table and examples below. Integer Operation Command Float Operation 6-5-3 Equation + − Var1=Var2 + Var3 Var1=Var2 − Var3 * / Var1 = Var2 * Var3 Var1= Var2 / Var3 Description Remarks Addition Subtraction % Var1= Var2 % Var ADDSUMW Var1 = ADDSUMW(Var2, Var3) These commands store the calculated result as signed or unsigned WORD and DWORD. Multiplication When the data is more than the Division length of specified unit, these Get Remainder commands discard the data out of range. Sum = FADD Var1 = Var2 Var1=FADD(Var2, Var3) Assignment Addition FSUB Var1=FSUB(Var2, Var3) Subtraction FMUL Var1=FMUL(Var2, Var3) Multiplication FDIV Var1=FDIV(Var2, Var3) Division FMOD Var1=FMOD(Var2, Var3) Get Remainder Float Operation is the operation of signed 32-bit data. +, FADD Addition Equation: Var1 = Var2 + Var3[(Signed | DW)] Var1 = FADD(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW) This command adds Var2 and Var3, and stores the added result in Var1. 189 Section 6-5 Macro Function Example: Adds the value in the internal memory $2 and 1. $2 = $2 + 1 Adds the value in the internal memory $1 and $2, and stores the total in the address $3. $3 = $2 + $1 Adds the value in the internal memory $4 and 1.9. $4 = FADD($4, 1.9) (Signed DW) Combines the float values in the internal memory $4 and $6, and stores the total in the address $8. $8 = FADD($4, $6) (Signed DW) -, FSUB Subtraction Equation: Var1 = Var2 - Var3[(Signed | DW)] Var1 = FSUB(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW) This command subtracts Var3 from Var2, and stores the subtracted result in Var1. Example: Subtracts 1 from the value in the internal memory $2. $2 = $2 - 1 Subtracts the value in the internal memory $1 from the value in the internal memory $2, and stores the result in the internal memory $3. $3 = $2 - $1 Subtracts 1.9 from the value in the internal memory $4. $4 = FSUB($4, 1.9) (Signed DW) Subtracts the float value in the internal memory $6 from the float value in the internal memory $4, and stores the result in the internal memory $8. $8 = FSUB($4, $6) (Signed DW) *, FMUL Multiplication Equation: Var1 = Var2 * Var3[(Signed | DW)] Var1 = FMUL(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW) This command multiplies Var2 by Var3, and stores the result in Var1. Example: Multiplies the value in the internal memory $2 by 2. $2 = $2 * 2 Multiplies the value in the internal memory $2 by $1, and stores the result in the address $3. $3 = $2 * $1 Multiplies the value in the internal memory address $4 by 1.5. $4 = FMUL($4, 1.5) (Signed DW) Multiplies the float value in the internal memory $4 by $6, and stores the result in $8. 190 Section 6-5 Macro Function $8 = FMUL($4, $6) (Signed DW) /, FDIV Division Equation: Var1 = Var2 / Var3[(Signed | DW)] Var1 = FDIV(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW) Divides Var2 by Var3, and stores the result in Var1. The value in Var3 cannot be equal to 0(zero). Example: Divides the value in the internal memory $2 by 5, and stores the result in the address $3. $3 = $2 / 5 Divides the value in the internal memory $4 by 4.3, and stores the result in the address $6. $6 = FDIV($4, 4.3) (Signed DW) %, FMOD Get Remainder Equation: Var1 = Var2 % Var3[(Signed | DW)] Var1 = FMOD(Var2, Var3) (Signed DW) This command divides Var2 by Var3, and stores the remainder in Var1. The value in Var3 cannot be equal to 0(zero). Example: Divides the value in the internal memory $2 by 5, and stores the remainder in the address $3. $3 = $2 % 5 Divides the value in the internal memory $4 by 4, and stores the remainder in the address $6. $6 = FMOD($4, 4) (Signed DW) = Assignment Equation: Var1 = Var2[(Signed DW | DW)] This operator (=) assigns data at Var2 to Var1. After the PT executes MOV command, data at Var2 do not change. Example: Assigns a constant number 4 to the internal memory $0. $0 = 4 Assigns the values in the internal memory address $2 to the values in the internal memory address $4. $4 = $2 ADDSUMW Repeated addition Equation: Var1 = ADDSUMW(Var2, Var3)[(DW)] 191 Section 6-5 Macro Function This command adds Var2, Var2+1, Var2+2, ..., and Var2+(the value of Var3 − 1), and stores the repeated addition result in Var1. Example: $2 = 1 $3 = 2 $4 = 3 $5 = 3 $0 = ADDSUMW($2, $5) Adds the values in the internal memory address $2 to $4, and stores the sum total in the address $0. You can specify the number of data you add with $5. The value of the sum total is equal to 6($2 + $3 + $4). ■ Logical Operation There are six logical operations, which include OR, AND, XOR, NOT, Shift-left and Shift-right. Each operation has three operands. Each operand can be the internal memory or constant. The operands that store output results must be the internal memory. The unit can be Word and Double Word. For details, refer to this table and examples below. Command Equation Description | && Var1 = Var2 | Var3 Logical OR operation Var1 = Var2 && Var3 Logical AND operation ^ NOT Var1 = Var2 ^ Var3 Var1 = NOT Var2 Logical XOR operation Logical NOT operation Var1 = Var2 >> Var3 Logical Shift-right operation Remarks These commands store the calculated result as WORD and DWORD. | Logical OR operation Equation: Var1 = Var2 | Var3[(DW)] This command does the logical OR operation on Var2 and Var3, and stores the result in Var1. Example: $2 = F000H $4 = 0F00H $2 = $2 | $4 Stores FF00H in $2. && Logical AND operation Equation:Var1 = Var2 && Var3[(DW)] This command does the logical AND operation on Var2 and Var3, and stores the result in Var1. Example: $2 = F000H $4 = 0F00H $2 = $2 && $4 Stores 0000H in $2. 192 Section 6-5 Macro Function ^ Logical XOR operation Equation: Var1 = Var2 ^ Var3[(DW)] This command does the logical XOR operation on Var2 and Var3, and stores the result in Var1. Example: $2 = F100H $4 = 0F00H $2 = $2 ^ $4 Stores FE00H in $2. NOT Logical NOT operation Equation: Var1 = NOT Var2 [(Signed | DW)] This command does the logical NOT operation on Var2, and stores the result in Var1. Example: $2 = F100H $4 = NOT $2 Stores 0EFFH in $4. > Var3[(DW)] This command shifts Var2 (WORD/DWORD) data to the right (the number of bit is Var3), and stores the result in Var1. Example: $2 = F100H $2 = $2 >> 4 Shifts $2 to the right by 4 bits, and becomes 0F10H 193 Section 6-5 Macro Function ■ Data Transfer There are four Data transfer commands, which include MEMCOPY, MEMSET, STRCPYB and FMOV. For details, refer to this table and examples below. Command Equation MEMCOPY MEMCOPY (Var1, Var2, Var3) Description Block move MEMSET MEMSET (Var1, Var2, Var3) Fills the memory STRCPYB STRCPYB (Var1, Var2, Var3) Converts text to ASCII code FMOV Var1 = FMOV(Var2) Transfers float data Remarks Data type for Var1 and Var2 is address. Var2 is an input string. MEMCOPY Copies data of the specified number of words Equation: MEMCOPY (Var1, Var2, Var3) This command copies data from address Var2 to address Var1 in words. You can specify the number of words you copy with Var3. If the address at the copy destination becomes more than the maximum number, an error will occur when you execute validation. Example: Copies the data in $0, $1, $2 and $3 to $10, $11, $12 and $13 in sequence. $0 = 1 $1 = 2 $2 = 3 $3 = 4 MEMCOPY ($10, $0, 4) After the PT executes MEMCOPY command, $10=1, $11=2, $12=3, $13=4. MEMSET Fills the memory with the specified data Equation: MEMSET (Var1, Var2, Var3) [(Signed)] This command fills the memories from the address in Var1 with data in address Var2. The number of memories is Var3. If the write destination address becomes more than the maximum number, an error occurs when you execute validation. Example: $5 = 10 MEMSET ($0, $5, 4) Executes MEMSET command to fill $0, $1, $2, $3 with a constant 10. STRCPYB Converts Text to ASCII code Equation: STRCPYB (Var1, “Var2”) This command converts text in address Var2 to ASCII code, and stores it in Var1. The maximum length is 128 words. Example: STRCPYB ($1, “AB12”) 194 Section 6-5 Macro Function After the PT executes STRCPYB command, it stores 4241H in $1 and 3231H in $2. FMOV Transfers Float Data Equation: Var1 = FMOV(Var2) (Signed DW) This command transfers float data from Var2 to Var1. After the PT executes this command, there is no change in data of Var2. Example: Transfers a constant 44.3 to the internal memory address $0. $0 = FMOV(44.3) (Signed DW) ■ Data Conversion Command Equation BCD Var1 = BCD (Var2) Description Converts binary data to BCD BIN XWD Var1 = BIN (Var2) Var1 = XWD (Var2) Converts from BCD data to binary. Converts WORD to DWORD XBW XWB Var1 = XBW (Var2, Var3) Var1 = XWB (Var2, Var3) Converts BYTE to WORD Converts WORD to BYTE SWAP XCHG SWAP (Var1, Var2, Var3) XCHG (Var1, Var2, Var3) Swaps BYTE data Exchanges data MAX MIN Var1 = MAX (Var2, Var3) Var1 = MIN (Var2, Var3) Gets maximum value Gets minimum value STR2H Var1 = STR2H (Var2, Var3, Var4) Converts text data (ASCII format) to hexadecimal data H2STR Var1= H2STR (Var2, Var3) Converts hexadecimal data to text data (ASCII format) FCNV ICNV Var1= FCNV (Var2) Var1= ICNV (Var2) Converts integer to float value Converts float value to integer BCD Converts binary data to BCD value Equation: Var1 = BCD(Var2) [(DW)] This command converts the binary data in Var2 to BCD value, and stores it in Var1. Example: The binary data in $4 is 5564. After the PT executes BCD command, it converts the binary data in $4 to 5564H. $4 = 5564 $4 = BCD($4) BIN Converts BCD data to binary data value Equation: Var1 = BIN(Var2) [(DW)] This command converts the BCD data in Var2 to binary data value, and stores in Var1. Example: 195 Section 6-5 Macro Function The BCD (hexadecimal) data in $4 is 5564H. After the PT executes BIN command, it converts the BCD data in $4 to 5564. $4 = 5564H $4 = BIN($4) XWD Converts WORD to DWORD Equation: Var1 = XWD(Var2) [Signed] This command converts the WORD value in Var2 to DWORD value, and stores in Var1. Example: The WORD value in decimal format in $4 is -7. After the PT executes XWD command, it converts the word value in $4 to DWORD value and stores it in $7. $4 = -7 Signed $7 = XWD($4)(Signed) XBW Converts BYTE to WORD Equation: Var1 = XBW (Var2, Var3) This command converts BYTE data (the number of bytes is Var3) from Var2 to WORD value, and stores the result in Var1. It converts two bytes of Var2 to two words and stores it in Var1. it fills the high byte with 0. Example: Assume that the value of $65534 is 12. Converts 12 BYTES (6 WORDS) to 12 WORDS from $785, and stores the result in $10 to $21. $10=XBW($785, $65534) XWB Converts WORD to BYTE Equation: Var1 = XWB(Var2, Var3) This command converts WORD data (the number of bytes is Var3) from lowbyte of Var2 to BYTE format, and stores the result in Var1. This command discards the high-byte of Var2. Example: Assume that the value of $985 is 12. This command reads 12 WORDS from low-byte of $986, and converts these 12 WORDS to 12 BYTES (6 WORDS), and stores the result in $65 to $70. $65= XWB($986, $985) SWAP Swaps BYTE Data Equation: SWAP (Var1, Var2, Var3) This command swaps the high-byte and low-byte of Var2, Var2+1, Var2+2...Var2+Var3 (WORD), and stores the result in Var1, Var1+1, Var1+2...Var1+Var3 in sequence. 196 Section 6-5 Macro Function Example: Swaps the high-byte and low-byte of $10, $11, ..., $14, and stores the result in $1, $2, .., $5 in sequence. SWAP($1, $10, 5) If $11 = 1234H, after the PT executes SWAP command, $2 = 3412H. XCHG Exchanges Data Equation: XCHG (Var1, Var2, Var3)[(DW)] This command exchanges the data of Var2, Var2+1, Var2+2...Var2+Var3 for the data of Var1, Var1+1, Var1+2.., Var1+Var3. After the PT executes XCHG command, it exchanges the data of Var1 for Var2. Example: Exchanges the data of $10, $11, ..., $14 for the data of $1, $2, .., $5 in sequence. XCHG($1, $10, 5) If $11 = 1234H and $2 = 5678H, after the PT executes XCHG command, $2 = 1234H and $1 = 5678H. MAX Gets Maximum Value Equation: Var1 = MAX(Var2, Var3)[(Signed DW | DW)] This command gets the maximum value from Var2 and Var3, and stores the result in Var1. Example: $0 = 0 $1 = 2 $2 =10 $0 = MAX($1, $2) The result a $0 = 10 MIN Gets Minimum Value Equation: Var1 = MIN(Var2, Var3)[(Signed DW | DW)] This command gets the minimum value from Var2 and Var3, and stores the result in Var1. Example: $0 = 0 $1 = 2 $2 =10 $0 = MIN($1, $2) The result a $0 = 2 STR2H Converts text data (ASCII format) to hexadecimal data. 197 Section 6-5 Macro Function Equation: Var1 = STR2H (Var2, Var3, Var4) Var1: Data storage address of conversion destination. (Internal memory address) Var2: Data storage address of conversion source. (Internal memory address) Var3: Data size you convert Var4: Data length Var4==0: Data length is byte Var4==1: Data length is word Var4==2: Data length is double word This command converts the text data in the address specified with Var2 by the size specified with Var3. Then it stores the result in Var1. Example: Converts the text data of $100 to $107 to hexadecimal data, and stores the result in $0 to $3. Assume that the text data below are stored in $100 to $107 before the PT executes this command. $100 '1' $101 '2' $102 '3' $103 '4' $104 '5' $105 '6' $106 '7' $107 '8' $0 = STR2H($100,8,0) The result → $0 = 12H(WORD) $1 = 34H(WORD) $2 = 56H(WORD) $3 = 78H(WORD) H2STR Converts hexadecimal data to text data (ASCII format) Equation: Var1= H2STR (Var2, Var3) This command converts the hexadecimal data in the address specified with Var2 by the size specified with Var3. Then it stores the result in Var1. Example: $100 = 1234H $0 = H2STR($100,1) The result → $0 = 31H $1 = 32H $2 = 33H $2 = 34H FCNV Converts integer to float value Equation: Var1= FCNV (Var2)(Signed DW) This command converts the integer in Var2 to float value, and stores it in Var1. Example: $2 = 100 $1 = FCNV($2)(Signed DW) The result → $1 = 100.0 198 Section 6-5 Macro Function ICNV Converts float value to integer Equation: Var1= ICNV (Var2) This command converts the float value in Var2 to an integer, and stores in Var1. Example: $2=FMOV(100.5) (Signed DW) $1 = ICNV ($2)(Signed DW) The result → $1 = 100 ■ Comparison IF...THEN GOTO LABEL ... Equation: IF expression THEN GOTO LABEL identifier If the command of expression is true, the process goes to LABEL identifier to execute the program. Comparison command table Command A == B Description A is equal to B A!= B A>B A is not equal to B A is greater than B A >= B A Var3 Var2 < Var3 0 1 2 Flow Control There are five types for flow control, which include GOTO, LABEL, CALL..RET, FOR...NEXT and END. 200 Section 6-5 Macro Function GOTO Goes to a specific Label without condition Equation: GOTO LABEL Var1 When the PT executed the GOTO statement, the process goes to the Label specified with Var1 and continues to execute the program. Example: Goes to the position of specified Label 2 without condition, and continues to execute the program. GOTO LABEL 2 ..... LABEL 2 LABEL GOTO statement shifts the program execution to the position of LABEL without condition Equation: LABEL Var1 Note: You cannot use the same label more than one time in a Macro. Example: Goes to the position of specified Label 2, and continues to execute the program. GOTO LABEL 2 ..... LABEL 2 ..... If you use more than one Label 2, an error will occur to tell you it is invalid. LABEL 2 ..... CALL..RET Calls sub-macro program Equation: CALL Var1 Var1 is the sub-macro number. The sub-macro number can be 001 to 512. Var1 must be internal memory address or constant. When the CALL command is executed, the process shifts to the sub-macro. If the RET command is executed in the sub-macro program, the process returns to the CALL source of the sub-macro. If there is not a RET command, after all commands in the called sub-macro are executed, the RET command is automatically executed. In the sub-macro program, you can also call other submacro. But to keep sufficient memory, the levels for CALL sub-macro must be less than 6 levels. FOR...NEXT Program Loop Equation: 201 Section 6-5 Macro Function FOR Var1 Statement NEXT You can use this command for nested loops. FOR is the start of the loop and NEXT is the end of the loop. A maximum of five nested loops is possible. Var1 can be the internal memory or constant. When the PT executes this command, this command executes the number of times specified with Var1 Statement continuously. In the Statement, you can write a macro command that the PT executes again and again. You can change Var1 value in the Statement, but cannot change the number of times. Example: $10 = 10 $1 = 0 FOR $10 $1 = $1 + 1 $10 = 2 NEXT After the operation, the result is $1 = 10, $10 = 2. Note: You cannot change the loop times even when you reset the value in $10. END Ends the macro Equation: Statemenets1 END Statements2 This command ends the macro program. It executes the Statemenets1 and then ends the macro executing. It does not execute the Statements2. If there is END command in sub-macro, the program ends here. Example: $1 = 10 $1 = $1 + 1 END $1 = $1 + 1 After the operation, the result is $1 = 11, not $1 = 12 as the END command ended the macro program. ■ Bit Setting There are four BIT settings, which include BITSET, BITCLR, BITINV and BITGET. Bit setting command table Command BITSET BITCLR 202 Equation BITSET Var1 BITCLR Var1 Description Sets Var1 bit to be ON. Sets Var1 bit to be OFF. Section 6-5 Macro Function Command BITINV Equation BITINV Var1 Description Sets Var1 bit to be reversed. BITGET Var1 = BITGET Var2 Gets Var2 bit value and stores in Var1. BITSET Sets specified bit to be ON Equation: BITSET Var1 This command sets Var1 bit to be ON Example: Sets 1 in the bit 0 in the internal memory $0. $0 = FFFEH BITSET $0.0 The result → $0 = FFFFH BITCLR Sets specified bit to be OFF Equation: BITCLR Var1 This command sets Var1 bit to be OFF Example: Sets 0 in the bit 0 in the internal memory $0. $0 = FFFFH BITCLR $0.0 The result → $0 = FFFEH BITINV Sets specified bit to be reversed. ON a OFF, OFF a ON Equation: BITINV Var1 This command sets Var1 bit to be reversed. ON a OFF, OFF a ON Example: Inverses the bit 0 in the internal memory $0, and stores it. $0 = FFFEH BITINV $0.0 The result → $0 = FFFFH BITGET Gets bit value Equation: Var1 = BITGET Var2 This command gets Var2 bit value, and stores in Var1 Example: Gets the 3rd bit value in $0, and stores it to the 5th bit in $10. $0 = FFFEH $10 = 0 $10.5 = BITGET $0.3 The result → $10 = 20H 203 Section 6-5 Macro Function ■ Communication Communication command table Note Command INITCOM Equation Var1= INITCOM (Var2) Description Initial setup COM port ADDSUM Var1=ADDSUM(Var2, Var3) XORSUM Var1 = XORSUM(Var2, Var3) PUTCHARS (See note.) GETCHARS (See note.) Var1 = PUTCHARS(Var2, Var3, Var4) Var1 = GETCHARS(Var2, Var3, Var4) Uses addition to calculate checksum Uses XOR to calculate checksum Outputs characters by COM port Gets characters by COM port SELECTCOM CLEARCOMBUFFER (See note.) CHRCHKSUM SELECTCOM(Var1) CLEARCOMBUFFER(Var1, Var2) Var1 = CHRCHKSUM(Var2, Var3, Var4) Selects COM port Clears COM port buffer Calculates the ASCII data of string, character length and checksum. There are macros that are not synchronized with any screen events, such as switching screens or pressing a switch: Project Resident Macro, Project Periodic Macro, and Screen Periodic Macro. If communications commands that access communications buffers (PUTCHARS(), GETCHARS(), or CLEARCOMBUFFER()) are placed in any of these macros, the communications buffers may be read or written at unexpected timing. This may conflict with commands in other macros, causing incorrect data to be read or causing data to be corrupted by being overwritten. When combining macros that are not synchronized with any screen events or when combining a macro that is not synchronized with a screen event with another type of macro, place any commands that access the communications buffers into one macro. INITCOM After you set each COM port, this command starts communication. It stores the result in Var1. 1: Completed normally 0: Failed INITCOM 204 Section 6-5 Macro Function Var2 settings in INITCOM Interface COM port Parity bit Data Bit Baud rate Stop bit Flow control To make sure that data transmit between computer and PT is completed, you can use Flow Control functions. Flow control No Flow Control CTS/RTS DSR/DTR XON/XOFF This function disables the flow control function. This function is a flow control for hardware. It uses handshaking signal to control receiving and sending data. This function is also a flow control for hardware. You can use this function to connect a computer and a PT directly by a cable. This function is a flow control for software. It creates a control code with software and adds the code to the transmission data. ADDSUM Adds to calculate checksum Var1=ADDSUM(Var2, Var3) Var1: Value after calculation Var2: Starting address for calculation Var3: Data length 205 Section 6-5 Macro Function XORSUM This command uses XOR to calculate checksum. Var1=XORSUM (Var2, Var3) Var1: Value after calculation Var2: Starting address for calculation Var3: Data length PUTCHARS Outputs characters by COM port Var1= PUTCHARS (Var2, Var3, Var4). The result will be stored in Var1. Var1: Response value after communication 1: Completed normally 0: Failed Var2: Starting address of transmission data Var3: Data length Var4: Allowance communication time (unit is ms) 206 Section 6-5 Macro Function GETCHARS Gets characters by COM port Var1= GETCHARS (Var2, Var3, Var4). The result will be stored in Var1. Var1: Response value after communication 1: Completed normally 0: Failed Var2: Starting address of transmission data Var3: Data length Var4: Allowance communication time (unit is ms). SELECTCOM Selects COM port If you do not connect the PLC (if you set the Protocol to NULL in PT Menu − PT Setting), you can use two COM ports (0:COM1, 1:COM2) at the same time. Note After the PT executes this command, the PT executes all communication commands through the specified COM port. Other macros do not affect each other, even if the PT uses a different macro. 207 Section 6-5 Macro Function CLEARCOMBUFFER Clears the COM port buffer Equation: CLEARCOMBUFFER(Var1, Var2) Var1: The number of communication ports. Constant 0(COM1) or 1(COM2). Var2: The type of buffer area. Constant 0 (receiving buffer area) or 1 (sending buffer area) Example: Clears the sending buffer area of COM2 CLEARCOMBUFFER(1, 1) CHRCHKSUM Calculates the ASCII data of the string, character length and checksum. Equation:Var1 = CHRCHKSUM(Var2, Var3, Var4) 208 Section 6-5 Macro Function Var1: The internal memory address where the character length of ASCII data of Var2 + data length of checksum is stored. Var2: The string of text. Var3: The internal memory address where the ASCII data of Var2 and checksum is stored. Var4: The data length of the checksum that stores in Var3. 1 represents byte and 2 represents word. Operation of checksum: Converts format of each data characters to ASCII code and adds them up. For example, when '1' is converted to ASCII code '31H' and '4' is converted to ASCII code '34H', the checksum is 31H + 34H = 65H. Example: Calculates the ASCII data of 14, data length and checksum. $0 = CHRCHKSUM(“14”, $10, 2) After the above operation, it stores 4 in $0. 4 represents that 2 bytes (ASCII data length) + 2 bytes (data length of checksum) = 4 bytes. The checksum that is stored in $10 is 65H. ■ Others Command TIMETICK Equation Var1 = TIMETICK GETLASSERROR Var1 = GETLASTERROR Description Gets the time from system startup to present Gets last error value # DELAY #Var1 DELAY Var1 Comment System delay GETSYSTEMTIME SETSYSTEMTIME Var1 = GETSYSTEMTIME SETSYSTEMTIME(Var1) Gets system time Sets system time GETHISTORY Var1 = GETHISTORY (Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6) Gets history data TIMETICK Gets the time from system startup to present, and saves into the specified address. The time unit is 100ms. GETLASTERROR Gets the last error value If there is no error, the result of GETLASTERROR is 0. Even if each Macro is executed at the same time, the error message does not affect the macro. For details on error code, refer to 6-5-4 Error Messages. 209 Section 6-5 Macro Function COMMENT Inserts macro descriptions Macro descriptions make the operations clear. This command does not have an effect on the Macro function. To change the equation to be a comment, put “#” symbol in front of the equation. The comment starts from “#” symbol and ends at the end of the sentence. To change the comment to be equation, remove the “#” symbol. DELAY Delays the user setting time by system Delay can occur because of the structure of the NP-series PTs. The unit of delay time is ms. GETSYSTEMTIME Gets system time Equation: Var1 = GETSYSTEMTIME 210 Section 6-5 Macro Function Var1 is the starting address of continuous 7 Words in the internal memory address. Var1 Year Var1 + 1 Month Var1 + 2 Date Var1 + 3 Week Var1 + 4 Hour Var1 + 5 Minute Var1 + 6 Second Example: Now the system time is 2008/01/09 Wed 09:26:25. This command gets the current system time, and stores it in $1 to $7. $1 = GETSYSTEMTIME Gets $1 = 2008, $2 = 01, $3 = 9, $4 = 3, $5 = 9, $6 = 26, $7 = 25 SETSYSTEMTIME Sets system time Equation: SETSYSTEMTIME(Var1) Var1 is the starting address of continuous 7 words in the internal memory address. Var1 Year Var1 + 1 Month Var1 + 2 Date Var1 + 3 Week Var1 + 4 Hour Var1 + 5 Minute Var1 + 6 Second Example: Sets the current system time as 2008/01/09 Wed 09:26:25. $1 = 2008 $2 = 1 $3 = 9 $4 = 3 $5 = 9 $6 = 26 $7 = 25 SETSYSTEMTIME($1) GETHISTORY Gets history data Equation: Var1 = GETHISTORY (Var2, Var3, Var4, Var5, Var6) Var1: Specify the internal memory address where the data length is stored. Var2: Use the internal memory or constant to specify the logging buffer number. 211 Section 6-5 Macro Function Var3: Use the internal memory address or constant to decide which number of logged data is stored. Specify the number 1, 2, 3,..., (logging points). Var4: Use the internal memory or constant to specify points for reading. Var5: Use the internal memory or host address to specify a starting address for saving data. Var6: Use the internal memory or constant to specify a data type to read. 0: Data, 1: Time, 2: Time and Data 6-5-4 Error Messages The Output Window shows errors after validation. ■ Error Messages While You Edit Code − 100: LABEL cannot be found There is no LABEL that GOTO specifies. Code − 101: Recursion occurs This error message usually shows in sub-macro. The function of a sub-macro to call is called recursion whether the PT calls it directly or not. The sub-macro does not usually use recursion. As an alternative for it, you can use GOTO or FOR (infinite times). Code − 102: More than 3 nested FOR is used This error message tells you not to use more than 3 nested FOR commands to keep sufficient memory. As an alternative for it, you can use GOTO or IF. Code − 103: Sub-macro does not exist This error message tells you that there is no sub-macro in the program. For example, CALL 5 means CALL sub-macro 5. This error message shows when you do not edit sub-macro 5 in the program. This message shows to make sure that there are no errors. These errors include input error and absence of related sub-macro. Code − 104: Number of NEXT is less than the number of FOR The number of NEXT and FOR commands must be the same. This error code shows when the number of NEXT commands is less than that of FOR commands. Code − 105: Number of FOR is less than the number of NEXT The number of FOR and NEXT commands must be the same. This error code shows when the number of FOR commands is less than that of NEXT commands. Code − 106: Repeated LABEL This error message shows to tell you that one macro has the same LABEL more than one time. It shows during validation. If you use the same LABEL more than one time, the program does not operate correctly. Code − 107: There is RET in Macro This error message tells you that there is RET command in macro. To return program, you can use RET command in sub-macro. But in macro, you must use END. ■ PT Macro Error Messages The user can read error messages by macro. 212 Section 6-5 Macro Function Code − 10: GOTO Error This message tells you that there is GOTO error in macro. Code − 11: Stack Overflow This message tells you that stack in macro is full. This can occur if you use too many sub-macros or execute different macros at the same time. This message shows to keep sufficient memory. Code − 12: CALL Empty Sub-macro This message tells you that there is a CALL sub-macro error. The sub-macro that is called must not be an empty sub-macro. This message shows to prevent an unexpected error. Code − 13: Data Read Error This message tells you that there is a data read error. This can occur if there is a memory data error, but usually it occurs if there is a host data read error. Code − 14: Data Write Error This message tells you that there is a data write error. This can occur if there is a memory data error, but usually it occurs if there is a host data write error. Code − 15: Divisor is 0 This error message tells you that the divisor is 0 when you do division operation. ■ PT Communication Error Messages Communication Busy Error Message: Com x Station x: Communication Busy ... Unknown Code Error Message: Com x Station x: Receive Unknown Code ... No Response from Controller Error Message: Com x Station x: Controller No Response ... PT CheckSum Error Error Message: Com x Station x: Check Sum Error in PT Message ... Controller CheckSum Error Error Message: Com x Station x: Check Sum Error in Controller Message ... Incorrect Command Error Message: Com x Station x: Command Can Not be Executed ... Incorrect Address Error Message: Com x Station x: Address Fault ... Incorrect Value Error Message: Com x Station x: Value is Incorrect ... Controller is Busy Error Message: Com x Station x: Controller is Busy ... CTS Signal Fail Error Message: Com x Station x: CTS Signal Fail ... No Such Resource in Controller Error Message: Com x Station x: No Such Resource ... 213 Section 6-5 Macro Function No Such Service in Controller Error Message: Com x Station x: No Such Service ... Must Retry Error Message: Com x Station x: Must Retry ... PT Station Number Error Error Message: Com x Station x: PT Station Number Error ... Controller Station Number Error Error Message: Com x Station x: Controller Station Number Error ... UART Communication Error Error Message: Com x Station x: UART Communication Error ... Other Communication Error Error Message: Comx Station x: Other Communication Error ... 214 Section 6-6 Control Block and Status Block 6-6 6-6-1 Control Block and Status Block Control Block When you set the host address and size in Control Block, the host can control an NP-series PT. The control area consists of continuous word addresses. The length is between 0 and 8 words. The length can change if the function that you use on screen data changes. For example, for the Data Log function, a minimum of 5 words is necessary. When the size of Control Block is 0, the Control Block function is disabled. When the Control Block function is enabled, the host can control the PT. For details on settings, refer to 6-6-3 Settings. This table shows functions and gives explanations of each word. Word ■ Address Offset 0 1 Address for Designating Screen Number (SNIR) Control Flag Address (CFR) +0 +1 2 3 Curve Control Address (CUCR) Address for Sampling Data Log Buffer (HBSR) +2 +3 4 5 Address for Clearing Data Log Buffer (HBCR) Data Block Control Address (RECR) +4 +5 6 Address for Designating Data Block Group Number (RBIR) +6 7 System Control Flag Address (SCFR) +7 Address for Designating Screen Number (SNIR) Word 0 Function Designate Screen Number When you write a screen number to SNIR, the NP screen changes to that number. This function allows the NP display screen to be changed from the host. Specify the numerical value storage format in signed decimal, unsigned decimal, hexadecimal, or binary. When opening or closing a pop-up screen, write 0 to SNIR. ■ Control Flag Address (CFR) 0 Word Function Enable/Disable Communication 1 2 Turn ON/Turn OFF Backlight Sound the Siren 3 4 Clear Alarm Buffer Clear Alarm Counter 5 to 7 8 Reserved Set User Security Level (bit 0) 9 10 Set User Security Level (bit 1) Set User Security Level (bit 2) 11 to 15 Reserved Enable/Disable Communication Bit 0 controls the PT communications. When bit 0 is turned ON, the PT communication is disabled. When bit 0 turns OFF, the PT communication is enabled. 215 Section 6-6 Control Block and Status Block Turn ON/Turn OFF Backlight Bit 1 controls the PT backlight. When bit 1 is turned ON, the PT backlight turns OFF. When bit 1 turns OFF, the PT backlight turns ON. Sound the Siren Bit 2 controls the PT siren. When bit 2 is turned ON, the siren starts. When bit 2 is turned OFF, the siren stops. Clear Control Flag for Alarm Buffer Bit 3 clears the alarm buffer. When bit 3 is turned ON, the alarm buffer is cleared. To control the alarm buffer again, this flag must be turned OFF and then ON. Clear Control Flag for Alarm Counter Bit 4 clears the alarm counter. When bit 4 is turned ON, the alarm counter is cleared. To control the alarm counter again, this flag must be turned OFF and then ON. Set User Security Level Bits 8 to 10 set the PT user security level. The level is from 0 to 7. MSB is Bit 10, and LSB is Bit 8. The default level is the Starting Level set with the PT Setting Dialog Box. If the security level of an object is higher than the current security level, the user must enter a password. The security level will then change to the higher level. The user can thus use all objects with a security level that is lower than or equal to this new user security level. If the user changes to the system menu and back to the application, the user security level goes back to the default level. ■ Curve Control Address (CUCR) Bit Function 0 1 Curve Sampling Flag 1 Curve Sampling Flag 2 2 3 Curve Sampling Flag 3 Curve Sampling Flag 4 4 to 7 8 Reserved Curve Clear Flag 1 9 10 Curve Clear Flag 2 Curve Clear Flag 3 11 12 to 15 Curve Clear Flag 4 Reserved Curve Sampling Control Flag (1-4) Bits 0 to 3 control the curve (Broken-Line or XY Distribution) sampling. When this control flag (Bit 0 to Bit 3) is turned ON, the PT reads continuous data from the set host address to sample once, changes the data to graph and shows it on PT screen. To control it again, this flag must be turned OFF and then ON. Curve Clear Control Flag (1-4) Bits 8 to 11 clear the curve (Broken-Line or XY Distribution) when this control flag (Bit 8 to Bit 11) is turned ON. To clear it again, this flag must be turned OFF and then ON. 216 Section 6-6 Control Block and Status Block ■ Address for Sampling Data Log Buffer (HBSR) The NP-series PT has 12 bits that control the sampling address of data log buffer. These bits not only sample on the Sampling Cycle specified in Data Log Setting Dialog Box of the NP-Designer, but also sample or clear the data log buffer through the host. For details on the settings of sampling data log buffer, refer to Data Log Setting of 6-2-4 PT Menu. 0 Bit Function Control Flag for Sampling Data Log Buffer 1 1 2 Control Flag for Sampling Data Log Buffer 2 Control Flag for Sampling Data Log Buffer 3 3 4 Control Flag for Sampling Data Log Buffer 4 Control Flag for Sampling Data Log Buffer 5 5 6 Control Flag for Sampling Data Log Buffer 6 Control Flag for Sampling Data Log Buffer 7 7 8 Control Flag for Sampling Data Log Buffer 8 Control Flag for Sampling Data Log Buffer 9 9 10 Control Flag for Sampling Data Log Buffer 10 Control Flag for Sampling Data Log Buffer 11 11 12 to 15 Control Flag for Sampling Data Log Buffer 12 Reserved Control Flag Address for Sampling Data Log Buffer Bits 0 to 11 control the sampling data log buffer operation of PT by the host. When this control flag (Bit 0 to Bit 11) is turned ON, the PT samples one time. To control the flag again, this flag must be turned OFF and then ON. ■ Address for Clearing Data Log Buffer (HBCR) Bit Function 0 1 Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer 1 Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer 2 2 3 Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer 3 Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer 4 4 5 Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer 5 Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer 6 6 7 Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer 7 Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer 8 8 9 Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer 9 Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer 10 10 11 Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer 11 Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer 12 12 to 15 Reserved Clear Flag of Data Log Buffer Bits 0 to 11 clear the PT data logs. When the control flag (Bit 0 to Bit 11) is turned ON, it clears the PT data logs. To control this flag again, this flag must be turned OFF and then ON. ■ Data Block Control Address (RECR) Bit 0 Function Control Flag for Changing Data Block Group Number 1 Control Flag for Reading Data Block (Host → PT) 217 Section 6-6 Control Block and Status Block 2 Bit Function Control Flag for Writing Data Block (PT → Host) 3 to 15 Reserved Control Flag for Changing Data Block Group Number Bit 0 specifies the data block group number (RCPNo). To specify it, 1,2,3... 1. Write the data block group number (N) to Designated Data block Group Number Address (RBIR), and 2. Turn ON this control flag (Bit 0). After the above settings, the RCPNo changes to N automatically. To control it again, this flag must be turned OFF and then ON. Control Flag for Reading Data Block (Host → PT) Bit 1 reads the data block from the host and stores the data block in the specified area of PT. To read and store the data block, 1,2,3... 1. Specify the data block group number (N). 2. Turn ON this control flag (Bit 1). To control it again, this flag must be turned OFF and then ON. Control Flag for Writing Data Block (PT → Host) Bit 2 writes the data block to the host. To write it, 1,2,3... 1. Specify the data block group number (N). (Refer to the Control flag for changing data block group number above) 2. Turn ON the control flag (bit 2). To control it again, this flag must be turned OFF and then ON. ■ Address for Designating Data Block Group Number (RBIR) Word 0 Function Designate Data Block Group Number When the Control Flag for Changing Data Block Group Number is turned ON to write the data block group number (N) into Address for Designating Data Block Group Number (RBIR), the RCP No changes. ■ System Control Flag Address (SCFR) Bit 218 0 Function Multi-language Setting Value (bit 0) 1 2 Multi-language Setting Value (bit 1) Multi-language Setting Value (bit 2) 3 4 Multi-language Setting Value (bit 3) Multi-language Setting Value (bit 4) 5 6 Multi-language Setting Value (bit 5) Multi-language Setting Value (bit 6) 7 8 to 15 Multi-language Setting Value (bit 7) Reserved Section 6-6 Control Block and Status Block ■ Multi-language Setting Value Bits 0 to 7 store the designated multi-language setting value. They also command the PT to switch to the specified language of a value that the user sets in this address. The setting range is between 0 and 255. MSB is bit 7, and LSB is bit 0. Note: If the user set a value that is not in the multi-language setting, the multilanguage state does not change. The state before the value is set remains. 6-6-2 Status Block When you set the address in Status Block, the host can read the status of NP-Series PT. If the size of Control Block is 0, the Control Block function is disabled. When the Control Block function is disabled, the Status Block function is also disabled. When the Status Block function is enabled, the host reads the PT status. For details on settings, refer to 6-6-3 Settings. This table shows functions and gives explanations of each word. Word Offset Status Address for General Control (GCSR) Status Address for Screen Number (SNSR) +0 +1 2 3 Status Address for Curve Control (CCSR) Status Address for Sampling Data Log Buffer (HSSR) +2 +3 4 Status Address for Clearing Data Log Buffer (HCSR) +4 5 6 Data Block Status Address (RESR) Status Address for Data block Number (RBSR) Status Address 2 for General Control (GCSR2) +5 +6 7 ■ Address 0 1 +7 Status Address for General Control (GCSR) Bit Function 0 1 to 2 Screen Switch Status Reserved 3 4 Clear Status of Alarm Buffer Clear Status of Alarm Counter 5 to 7 8 Reserved User Security Level Status (bit 0) 9 10 User Security Level Status (bit 1) User Security Level Status (bit 2) 11 to 15 Reserved Screen Switch Status When the PT switches the screen, bit 0 is turned ON. After the screen switch is completed, bit 0 is turned OFF. Clear Status of Alarm Buffer When the PT clears the alarm buffer, bit 3 is turned ON. After this function is completed, bit 3 is turned OFF. 219 Section 6-6 Control Block and Status Block Clear Status of Alarm Counter When the PT clears the alarm counter, bit 4 is turned ON. After this function is completed, bit 4 is turned OFF. User Security Level Status Bits 8 to 10 hold the current user security level (0 to 7). MSB is bit 10, and LSB is bit 8. Bit Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 User Security Level ■ 0 1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 3 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 4 5 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 6 7 OFF ON ON ON ON ON Status Address for Screen Number (SNSR) Word 0 Function The Last Open Screen Number The last Open Screen Number This address stores the last screen number you opened. When the user switches the screen, word 0 stores the last screen or pop-up screen that the users opened. ■ Status Address of Curve Control (CCSR) Bit 0 Function Sampling Status of Curve 1 1 2 Sampling Status of Curve 2 Sampling Status of Curve 3 3 8 Sampling Status of Curve 4 Clear Status of Curve 1 9 10 Clear Status of Curve 2 Clear Status of Curve 3 11 4 to 7, 12 to 15 Clear Status of Curve 4 Reserved Curve Sampling Status Flag When the PT samples a curve or XY distribution, the curve sampling status flag (bits 0 to 3) is turned ON. After the sampling operation is completed, the curve sampling status flag is turned OFF. Curve Clear Status Flag When the PT clears a curve or XY Distribution, the curve clear status flag (bits 8 to 11) is turned ON. After the clear operation is completed, the curve clear status flag is turned OFF. 220 Section 6-6 Control Block and Status Block ■ Status Address for Sampling Data Log Buffer (HSSR) Bit 0 Function Sampling Status of Data Log Buffer 1 1 2 Sampling Status of Data Log Buffer 2 Sampling Status of Data Log Buffer 3 3 4 Sampling Status of Data Log Buffer 4 Sampling Status of Data Log Buffer 5 5 6 Sampling Status of Data Log Buffer 6 Sampling Status of Data Log Buffer 7 7 8 Sampling Status of Data Log Buffer 8 Sampling Status of Data Log Buffer 9 9 10 Sampling Status of Data Log Buffer 10 Sampling Status of Data Log Buffer 11 11 12 to 15 Sampling Status of Data Log Buffer 12 Reserved Sampling Data Log Buffer Status Flag When the PT samples the data log buffer, the sampling data log buffer status flag (bits 0 to 11) is turned ON. After the sampling operation is completed, the sampling data log buffer status flag is turned OFF. ■ Status Address for Clearing Data Log Buffer (HCSR) Bit Function 0 1 Clear Status of Data Log Buffer 1 Clear Status of Data Log Buffer 2 2 3 Clear Status of Data Log Buffer 3 Clear Status of Data Log Buffer 4 4 5 Clear Status of Data Log Buffer 5 Clear Status of Data Log Buffer 6 6 7 Clear Status of Data Log Buffer 7 Clear Status of Data Log Buffer 8 8 9 Clear Status of Data Log Buffer 9 Clear Status of Data Log Buffer 10 10 11 Clear Status of Data Log Buffer 11 Clear Status of Data Log Buffer 12 12 to 15 Reserved Clear Data Log Buffer Flag When the PT clears data log buffer, the clear data log buffer status flag (bits 0 to 11) is turned ON. After the clearing operation is completed, the clear data log buffer status flag is turned OFF. ■ Data Block Status Address (RESR) Bit Function 0 1 Change Status of Data Block Number Data Block Read Status (Host → PT) 2 3 to 15 Data Block Write Status (PT → Host) Reserved 221 Section 6-6 Control Block and Status Block Change Status of Data Block Number Flag When the host changes the data block number, the change status of data block number flag (bit 0) is turned ON. After the PT changes the data block number and updates the RCPNo value, the change status of data block number flag is turned OFF. Data Block Read Status Flag When the PT reads one data block data from the host, the data block read status flag (bit 1) is turned ON. When the PT reads and saves the data block data fully, the data block read status flag is turned OFF. Data Block Write Status Flag When the PT sends one data block data to the host, the data block write status flag (bit 2) is turned ON. When the PT sends and writes the data block data to the host fully, the data block write status flag is turned OFF. ■ Status Address for Data Block Number (RBSR) Word 0 Function Current Data Block Number When the host or PT changes the data block number address (RCPNo), the PT also updates the Status Address for Data Block Number (RBSR). To know the current data block number, this Status Address for Data Block Number (RBSR) must be monitored. ■ Status Address 2 for General Control (GCSR2) Bit Function 0 1 Multi-language Status Value (bit 0) Multi-language Status Value (bit 1) 2 3 Multi-language Status Value (bit 2) Multi-language Status Value (bit 3) 4 5 Multi-language Status Value (bit 4) Multi-language Status Value (bit 5) 6 7 Multi-language Status Value (bit 6) Multi-language Status Value (bit 7) 8 to 15 Reserved Multi-language Status Value Bits 0 to 7 read the current language that the PT shows from the multi-language status value. Note: The PT stores the Value in the Screen Data Multi-Language Field. (PT Menu − PT Setting − Multi-Language Tab − Screen Data Multi-Language Field) 222 Control Block and Status Block 6-6-3 Section 6-6 Settings To control the PT and read the status, you must make these settings. 1,2,3... 1. Select PT Setting from PT Menu. The PT Setting Dialog Box shows. 2. Select Standard Tab Page. 3. Specify a starting address and size in the Control Block Field. 4. Specify a starting address in the Status Block Field. 223 Section 6-7 Internal Memory 6-7 Internal Memory ■ Internal Address (R/W): $ Word access: $n (n: 0 to 65535) Bit access: $n.b (n: 0 to 65535, b: 0 to 15) The NP-series PT has 65536 16-bit internal addresses ($0 to $65535). ■ Non-volatile Internal Address (R/W): $M Word access: $Mn (n: 0 to 1023) Bit access: $Mn.b (n: 0 to 1023, b: 0 to 15) The NP-series PT has 1024 16-bit non-volatile internal addresses ($M0 to $M1023). ■ Indirect Address (R/W): *$ Word access: *$n (n: 0 to 65535) The indirect address is an area where an address is stored. The user must get the address from $n, and then get the value stored in this address. *$n = $n m X For example, if $n = m; $m = X; then *$n = X. The value of m must not be more than 65535. ■ Data Block Number Address (R/W): RCPNO You can specify the data block group. The minimum data block group number must be 1. When you edit the data block, you set the maximum group number. When you upload/download data to the PT or PLC, the PT or PLC uses the setting of data block number address to read/write the data of data block group. When you edit the data block, you set the size of each group of data block. The NP-series PT has a space of 64k words for the data block. ■ Data Block Address (R/W): RCP The data block size is L and the data block group number is N. Word access: RCPn (n: 0 to NxL+(L-1)) Bit access: RCPn.b (n: 0 to NxL+(L-1), b: 0 to 15) The data block address saves the data block that you uploaded from the PT after you exit the NP-Designer. There are two methods to read/write these addresses: Assume that the set data block size is L and the data block group number is N: Use one of two methods below to access data that are set with data block. 1. Use RCPNO and RCP0 to RCP(L-1) 2. Use the equation: RCP{n×L+(m-1)} Example of how to access data: Setting the size L to 2 and the number of groups N to 3 with the data block. 224 Section 6-7 Internal Memory The data block size L is 2. Thus the data for RCPNO value will be stored in the RCP0 and RCP1, which are the first two addresses from the starting data block address. The value of RCPNO is 1 Data Block Address Data RCP0 RCP1 11 22 Data of the group number 1 is stored. The value of RCPNO is updated to 3. Data Block Address Data RCP0 RCP1 55 66 The value of data block address will be updated to data of the group number 3. Data will be stored in the data block address of RCP2 or later as follows. Data Block Address Data RCP2 11 RCP3 22 RCP4 33 RCP5 44 RCP6 55 RCP7 66 Data of the mth word of nth data block will be stored in RCP{n×L+(m-1)}. Thus data “55” (the first word of the group number 3) will be stored in RCP{3×2+(1-1)}=RCP6. Use one of the methods below to change data “55” of the first word of group number 3. 1. Set the value of RCPNO to 3. Then change the value of RCP0. 2. Change the value of RCP6. 225 Internal Memory 226 Section 6-7 SECTION 7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This section describes the maintenance and inspection methods for preventing errors occurring, and troubleshooting measures when errors occur in the PT. 7-1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 7-2 Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 7-3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 7-4 7-3-1 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3-2 Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requesting a Replacement PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 235 237 227 Section 7-1 Maintenance 7-1 Maintenance Perform maintenance operations to maintain the PT in optimum condition. ! WARNING After the NP-series PT has been installed, qualified personnel must confirm the installation, and must conduct test operations and maintenance. The qualified personnel must be qualified and authorized to secure safety at each phases of design, installation, running, maintenance, and disposal of system. Do not dismantle, repair, or modify the product. Doing so may lead to loss of safety functions. Backing up Project Data Always create a backup of project data and store it in a safe place when the PT malfunctions and needs to be sent out for repair, or when replacing the PT. Spare PTs Prepare a spare PT to allow quick recovery of the system at such times as when the PT malfunctions, or the service life of the backlight has expired causing poor screen visibility. Backlight The backlight must be replaced when the brightness of the display backlight dims and the display becomes difficult to see. The backlight cannot be replaced by the user. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. Backlight Replacement Guidelines Replace the backlight according to the following guidelines under normal conditions. After 50,000 hours of using NP5 at room temperature and humidity, (or after approximately 40,000 hours if an NP3 is used. (when the luminous intensity is decreased by 40% per LED)) The service life of the backlight will be especially shortened if used in a low-temperature environment. Replace the backlight when the brightness dims and the display becomes difficult to see. The backlights of PTs cannot be replaced by the user. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. Precautions for Safe Use Replacing the Battery Use a lithium battery to back up data other than screen data, such as calendar, clock, and log data. The battery service life is approximately five years at 25°C. The service life will be shortened if the battery is used at higher temperatures. After backing up the data, replace the battery periodically, according to the operating environment. Keep a spare battery available, so that the battery can be replaced immediately when required. Battery Models Manufacturer OMRON 228 Model CJ1W-BAT01 Section 7-1 Maintenance Replacement Guidelines The guidelines for replacing the battery are as follows: Replacement Method Perform the following procedure to replace the battery. • Replace when five years have lapsed since a new battery was installed in the PT. Replace when a message of battery replacement is displayed on the PT. Prepare a new battery. 1,2,3... 1. Open the System Menu. Press the Setting - Backup. 2. Turn OFF the power to the PT. 3. Open the battery cover on the rear panel of the PT. 4. Remove the battery that is secured inside the PT, grasp the cable, and pull the connector out to remove it. 5. Connect the new battery connector, and insert the battery into the battery holder in the battery cover. Make sure that the lead wire of the battery is placed to contact the upper side of the holder as shown in the Figure 2. Figure 1 Figure 2 6. Close the battery cover, being careful not to squash the battery cable. 229 Section 7-1 Maintenance Precautions for Correct Use Precautions for Safe Use The following data will be saved. Backup data will be restored automatically after replacing the battery. • Never use batteries that have been subjected to a severe shock, such as being dropped on the ground. Batteries subjected to shock may leak. • When mounting the battery, be sure to use the correct battery and mount it correctly. • If the battery is removed, the data stored in the PT will be deleted. • Do not attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery. • Password • Brightness and contrast • Refresh rate • Buzzer • Screen Saver Time • Startup delay time • Default language • PT internal memory • Communication parameter 230 Section 7-2 Inspection and Cleaning 7-2 Inspection and Cleaning Clean and inspect the PT periodically to maintain it in optimum condition for use. ! WARNING After installing the NP-series PT, qualified personnel must confirm the installation, and must conduct test operations and maintenance. The qualified personnel must be qualified and authorized to secure safety at each phases of design, installation, running, maintenance, and disposal of system. Cleaning Methods The screen visibility will be impaired if the display becomes dirty. Clean the display periodically using the following methods: • For daily cleaning, wipe with a soft, dry cloth. Attempting to remove heavy dirt with the cloth may scratch the front panel sheet. Use a damp cloth and wipe the surface again to remove dirt. • If dirt cannot be removed using a dry cloth, dampen the cloth sufficiently with a neutral cleaning agent solution (approximately 2%), squeeze the cloth out, and then wipe the surface. • Materials such as rubber, vinyl, or tape that are attached to the PT will leave stains if left for a long time. If such material is attached to the PT, remove when cleaning. Precautions for Safe Use Never use benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents, or chemical cloths to clean the PT. Inspection Methods Inspect the PT once every six to twelve months. Shorten the interval between inspections when using the PT in extreme conditions, such as under high temperatures, high humidity, or environments subject to large quantities of dust. Inspection Items Inspect the PT for the following items to check whether the PT is operating within the specified criteria. If the PT is outside the criteria, use measures such as improving the operating environment to conform to the standards, or tightening screws. Inspection items Inspection details Criteria Inspection means Power supply Power terminal voltage Allowable voltage range Tester fluctuation (24 VDC −10% to +15%) Ambient environment Ambient temperature (temperature in control panel) 0 to 50°C (Refer to Appendix A Specifications.) Thermometer Ambient humidity (temperature in control panel) Presence of dust 35% to 85% RH (Refer to Appendix A Specifications.) No dust accumulated. Temperature meter Presence of oil No oil between front Visual inspection panel sheet and molding. Visual inspection 231 Section 7-2 Inspection and Cleaning Inspection items Mounting conditions Parts with limited service life Inspection details Looseness of fixed mounting bracket Connection status of Connecting Cable Connectors Looseness of external wiring screws Status of external connecting cables Backlight brightness Battery Precautions for Safe Use 232 Criteria Inspection means Specified torque. Phillips screwdriver Fully inserted, locked, and with No looseness. Phillips screwdriver No looseness. Phillips screwdriver No breaks or other damage Sufficient brightness. Backlight life of NP5 (at room temperature of 25°C) is 50,000 hours, NP3 is 40,000 hours (when the luminous intensity is decreased by 40% per LED) as a guideline. 5 years (at room temperature of 25°C). Visual inspection, tester Visual inspection Replace every 5 years • Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the PT. • Follow all local government regulations, where applicable, when disposing of the PT and used batteries. • The Unit may not be usable in locations subject to long-term exposure to oil or water. The gasket will deteriorate after long-time use. Inspect the gasket on a regular basis. If deterioration is found, contact your OMRON representative. Section 7-3 Troubleshooting 7-3 Troubleshooting This section describes countermeasures for errors. 7-3-1 Errors If an error occurs during PT operation, find the symptoms of the error on the following table and then perform the suggested countermeasures. Precautions for Safe Use Check that the system is safe before turning the power ON/OFF. Do not dismantle, repair, or modify NP-series PTs. Errors during Data Transfer Symptoms Cause Cannot exeNot connected to cute serial data NP-Designer. transfer. The transfer setting of NP-Designer is set to USB. The PT is not in the transfer mode. Possible countermeasure Check the connection cable wiring. (Refer to 3-3 Connecting the NP-Designer) Personal com- A malfunction has puter cannot occurred due to detect PT when external noise. connected via USB. Configure the USB Hub and wire the USB cables taking measures to prevent noise. Timeout occurs during screen transfer using USB. Set the Transfer Setting to USB in Option Dialog Box from Tools Menu of the NP-Designer. Open File Fail was displayed on the PT. The transfer setting of NP-Designer is set to PC COM port. A malfunction has occurred due to external noise. No USB flash memory is connected to the PT even though saving data to USB flash memory was specified. Set the Transfer Setting to PC COM Port in Option Dialog Box from Tools Menu of the NP-Designer. Set the PT to the transfer mode. (Refer to SECTION 4 System Menu.) Configure the USB Hub and wire the USB cables taking measures to prevent noise. Connect USB flash memory to the PT or change the PT settings from the NP-Designer to save data to SRAM rather than USB flash memory. Errors at PT Startup Symptoms Indicators are not lit. Cause Power not supplied to the PT. Power supply fuse broken. System program corrupted. (Fatal error.) The indicator is Backlight failure. lit green and the screen is blank. Possible countermeasure Check the connections and supply power correctly to the PT. (Refer to 3-1 Installing the PT.) The PT must be repaired. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. The PT may be faulty. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. The backlight must be replaced. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. 233 Section 7-3 Troubleshooting Errors When Connecting the Host Symptoms Cannot connect to host. (An error message is displayed.) Cause A malfunction has occurred due to external noise. Possible countermeasure Wire the cable according to noise prevention measures. Protocol settings for the host and PT settings do not match. PT and host are not connected properly. Use NP-Designer to make communications settings. Check that the type of connection cable, the length, and the wiring meet the specifications. (Refer to 1-2 Communications with the Host) For 1:N NT Links, a With an NP-series PT, only one PT can be conduplicate unit num- nected to each PLC port even if the 1:N NT Link ber has been used. protocol is used. Two or more PTs cannot be connected. (Refer to 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links) Errors during PT Operation Symptoms RUN indicator does not light. Cause Power is not being supplied to the PT. Check the connections and supply power to the PT correctly. (Refer to 3-1 Installing the PT.) The fuse is broken. The PT must be repaired. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. The screen saver function is operating. This is not an error. Touch the screen. The backlight has malfunctioned. The backlight must be replaced. Contact your nearest OMRON representative. The display update is slow. Screen switching or opening and closing pop-up screens are being performed frequently. If screens are switched, opened and closed frequently, the display update may take some time and communications may be delayed. Adjust the interval between screen switches so that the system is not overloaded. The touch panel does not respond. PT has malfuncReset the PT, and wire it according to noise pretioned due to exter- vention measures. nal noise. The screen is blank. The touch panel is damaged. The display is dark. Cannot connect to a Programming Console Device Not Support was displayed on the PT. 234 Possible countermeasure If there is an abnormal symptom, contact your nearest OMRON representative. The brightness set- Increase the backlight brightness in the LCD of ting is too low. the System Menu. With some models of NP-series PTs, the backlight brightness cannot be adjusted. Please check the specifications. The backlight is The backlight must be replaced. Contact your faulty or its service nearest OMRON representative. life has expired. Host settings are Check the host settings. Use NT Link 1:N (normal incorrect. or high-speed) and set the maximum unit number to 0. The USB flash memory could not be detected. • Format the USB flash memory in FAT32 format. • Check to see if the USB flash memory is damaged. Section 7-3 Troubleshooting Errors During Object Operation Symptoms The numerical and character string update is slow. Cause Possible countermeasure Communications Perform noise countermeasures such as separatare unstable due to ing communications cables from power lines. external noise. There are too many Reduce the number of numeric display, numeric numeric display, input, string display and string input objects in the numeric input, screen where update is slow. string display and string input objects in the display. For RS-422A com- Wire correctly, referring to Appendix C Connecting munications, the to RS-422A/485. branch is incorrect or the terminating resistance is not set properly. Some objects in the screen are not displayed. The log graph display does not match the actual log timing. A communications error has occurred. The communications address set for the event of log timing is turning ON and OFF at high speed. Cannot input The numerical numerical valvalue input upper and lower limit ues. check function is running. Cannot input to A password has any object. Or been set. the function is not executed. Cannot switch to System Menu. 7-3-2 Check the communications settings. Set the ON/OFF cycle of the communications address for events to a longer time. Select Detail in the Property of the input object with NP-Designer and check the Minimum and Maximum values. Then correct them if necessary. Input the password in the password input dialog box that is displayed. A function that can Use the Function Switch or button to set a function switch a screen to that can switch a screen to System Menu. System Menu is not allocated. Error Messages If the messages listed on the following table are displayed on the computer, find the symptoms of the error below and then perform the suggested countermeasures. Troubleshooting Screen Data Transfers between Computer (NP-Designer) and PT This section describes possible errors during data transfer and their countermeasures. Message Cause Incorrect Model Models of the Name screen and PT do not match. Connection Time-out occurs failed while connecting to the PT or transferring. Countermeasure Check the model with PT Setting Dialog from PT Menu of the NP-Designer. Check the following. • Power supply to the PT • Cable connections (If this symptom still occurs, exit the application and restart the computer and PT. Then connect them again. 235 Section 7-3 Troubleshooting Message No Response From PT Cause • Attempted to transfer screen data using a method different from the transfer setting. • When attempted to transfer screen data through COM port, the PT was not in a transfer mode. • The SW1 slide switch on the back of the PT is turned ON. • The PT is busy. Countermeasure • Check the transfer setting in the Option Dialog from Tools Menu of the NP-Designer. • To transfer screen data through COM Port, the PT must be in a transfer mode. (Refer to SECTION 4 System Menu) • Turn OFF SW1 slide switch on the back of the PT before transferring screen data. • Restart the PT and transfer screen data. Transmission aborted Time-out occurs while connecting to the PT or transferring. Check the following. • Power supply to the PT • Cable connections (If this symptom still occurs, exit the application and restart the computer and PT. Then connect them again.) There was possibly a load on communication retries between the PT and host. (If this symptom still occurs, format the PT flash ROM and transfer the screen data again.) NP-Designer Error Messages This section describes possible errors during screen data editing and their countermeasures. Message 236 Cause Countermeasure The system cannot find the path specified. The output path for Check the output path in the Option Dialog from a file that was out- the Tools Menu of the NP-Designer, and specify it correctly. put by an error check, test function, file transfer, etc., is not correct. The system cannot find the file specified. (When starting NP-Designer). When NP-Designer --was started, it automatically tried to open the project that was edited most recently, and the file was not found. Requesting a Replacement PT 7-4 Section 7-4 Requesting a Replacement PT Always observe the following precautions when faults are detected during inspection and the PT is to be replaced. • Create a backup of the PT project data. Project data may be deleted when the PT is repaired by OMRON. • Always turn OFF the power before replacing the PT. • After replacing the PT, check to confirm that the new PT has no faults. • When returning a faulty PT for repair, include a document with the PT that provides as many details on the fault as possible, and send to your OMRON representative. 237 Requesting a Replacement PT 238 Section 7-4 Appendices Appendix A Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Appendix B Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Appendix C Connecting to RS-422A/485. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Appendix D Preparing Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Appendix E Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Appendix F List of Optional Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 239 Appendix A Specifications General Specifications Item Specifications NP5-MQ000B/NP5-MQ000 NP5-MQ001B/NP5-MQ001 NP5-SQ000B/NP5-SQ000 NP5-SQ001B/NP5-SQ001 NP3-MQ000B/NP3-MQ000 NP3-MQ001B/NP3-MQ001 Rated power supply voltage 24 VDC Allowable voltage range 21.6 to 27.6 VDC (24 VDC –10% to +15%) Allowable input power interruption time No restriction. Power consumption 12 W max. Ambient operating tempera- 0 to 50°C (See notes 1 and 2.) ture Storage temperature –20 to +60°C (See note 2.) Ambient operating humidity Operating environment 35 to 85%RH with no condensation (0 to 40°C) (See notes 2.) 35 to 50%RH with no condensation (40 to 50°C) (See notes 2.) No corrosive gases. Noise immunity Vibration resistance (during operation) 5 to 9 Hz with 3.1 mm amplitude and 9 to 150 Hz with 9.8 m/s2 acceleration for 30 min in each of X, Y, and Z directions Shock resistance (during operation) Dimensions Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 KV (power lines) 147 m/s2 3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions. 184.1 × 144.1 × 52.3 mm (W × H × D) 130.1 × 104.8 × 55.4 mm (W × H × D) Panel cutout dimensions Width 172.4 0 × Height 132.4 0 mm Panel thickness: 1.6 to 2.5 mm Width 118.5 0 × Height 92.5 0 mm Panel thickness: 1.6 to 2.5 mm Weight Enclosure rating 900 g max. Front panel: IP65 Oil-proof type (See note 3.) 500 g max. Battery life International standards 5 years (at 25°C) (See note 4.) EC Directives UL508 +1 +1 +1 (1) When a STN LCD display device is used, the display quality will decline (e.g., the contrast ratio will be reduced) if the temperature exceeds 40°C. Also, when the temperature drops, the response speed is lowered due to characteristics of liquid crystals. (2) Operate the PT within the temperature and humidity ranges shown in the following diagram. Humidity (RH) Wet-bulb temperature (˚C) Note +1 Storage Operating Temperature (˚C) 241 Appendix A Specifications (3) The Unit may not be usable in locations subject to long-term exposure to oil or water. The gasket will deteriorate after long-time use. Inspect the gasket on a regular basis. If deterioration is found, contact your OMRON representative. (4) If the battery is removed, data in the PT will be deleted. Characteristics Display Specifications Item Display panel (See note 3.) Backlight Display device Number of dots Display color 320 dot horizontal × 240 dot vertical 256 colors Monochrome/8 grayscale levels Display area Width 121.4 mm × height 92.6 mm (5.7 inches) Width 78.8 mm × height 59.6 mm (3.8 inches) View angle Left/right ±30°, Top 10°, Bottom 30° Left/right ±30°, Top 10°, Bottom 30° Life expectancy 50,000 hours min. (See note 2.) Brightness adjustment Cannot be adjusted 40,000 hours min. (See note 1.) There are 19 levels of adjustment by operating the touch panel. Backlight error detection No detection function. Front panel indicators Note Specifications NP5-SQ000B NP5-SQ000 NP5-SQ001B NP5-SQ001 5.7FSTN LCD Lit: Unlit: NP5-MQ000B NP5-MQ000 NP5-MQ001B NP5-MQ001 NP3-MQ000B NP3-MQ000 NP3-MQ001B NP3-MQ001 3.8STN LCD The power is turned to ON The power is turned to OFF (1) This is the estimated time when the luminous intensity is decreased by 40% per LED at room temperature and humidity. It is not a guaranteed value. (2) The life expectancy is given only as a guideline. It is not a guaranteed value. The life of the backlight will be much shorter at low temperatures. (3) There may be some defective pixels in the display. This is not a fault as long as the numbers of defective light and dark pixels fall within the following standard ranges. Number of light and dark pixels: 0.2 < (minor axis + major axis) / 2 ≤ 0.55 mm (within 1 per 20-mm square) Operating Specifications item Specifications NP5-SQ000B NP5-SQ000 NP5-SQ001B NP5-SQ001 Method: Resistive membrane NP5-MQ000B NP5-MQ000 NP5-MQ001B NP5-MQ001 NP3-MQ000B NP3-MQ000 NP3-MQ001B NP3-MQ001 Touch panel (Analogue type) Resolution: 1024 × 1024 (See notes 1 Input: Pressure-sensitive and 2.) Service life: 1,000,000 touch operations. Note (1) The display is analogue resistive membrane. When two or more points are pressed on the display simultaneously, a switch between these points may be operated. Do not press two or more points at the same time. (2) The specifications are the same for the function switches. 242 Appendix A Specifications External Interface Specifications Item NP5-SQ000B NP5-SQ000 NP5-SQ001B NP5-SQ001 USB HOST USB Slave Specifications NP5-MQ000B NP5-MQ000 NP5-MQ001B NP5-MQ001 NP3-MQ000B NP3-MQ000 NP3-MQ001B NP3-MQ001 1 port (for connecting USB memory) 1 port (screen data transfer, connected to personal computer) Programming Device (Software for Creating Screen Data) Item Specifications Name NP-Designer Model NP-NPDC0-V1 Communications Specifications Serial Communications Item COM1 Specifications Conforms to EIA RS-232C D-Sub female 9-pin connector 5VDC output (250 mA max.) through pin 6 Conforms to EIA RS-422A, RS-485. 10-pin terminal block COM2 1:1 NT Link Item Specifications Communications standards Connectors Conforms to EIA RS-232C D-Sub female 9-pin connector Conforms to EIA RS-422A/485 10-pin terminal block Number of Units connected Transmission distance 1:1 Up to 15 m. 1:1 Up to 500 m. 1:N NT Links Item Specifications Communications standards Connectors Conforms to EIA RS-232C. D-Sub female 9-pin connector Conforms to EIA RS-422A/485 10-pin terminal block Number of Units connected Transmission distance 1:1 Up to 15 m. 1:1 Up to 500 m. 243 Specifications 244 Appendix A Appendix B Dimensions NP5-@Q000(B) (Includes Mounting Dimensions) 156.0 144.1 16.0 122.0 184.1 57.8 131.4 52.3 28.5(Min.) 31.5(Max.) 5.8 49.5 (75.3) 34.2 171.4 5.0 54.6 72.1 78.0 245 Appendix B Dimensions NP5-@Q001(B) 156.0 144.1 16.0 122.0 184.1 57.8 5.8 34.2 171.4 5.0 72.1 78.0 246 28.5(Min.) 31.5(Max.) 54.6 49.5 (75.3) 131.4 52.3 Appendix B Dimensions NP3-@Q000(B) (Includes Mounting Dimensions) 16.0 55.4 104.8 64.0 28.5(Min.) 31.5(Max.) 84.0 130.1 52.6 16.0 5.6 42.8 (69.3) 43.9 117.8 12.5 52.4 58.3 247 Appendix B Dimensions NP3-@Q001(B) 16.0 55.4 104.8 64.0 28.5(Min.) 31.5(Max.) 84.0 130.1 16.0 52.6 5.6 42.8 43.9 117.8 52.4 58.3 248 12.5 (69.3) Appendix C Connecting to RS-422A/485 Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables Perform the following procedures to connect, process the shield, and connect to ground for communications using RS-422A or RS-485. Connecting the Ground Wire The PT has a functional ground terminal (FG: ). 1. Ground according to Figure (a) for normal grounding. • Connect the ground terminal (GR) of the devices to the functional ground (FG: ). Make sure that each signal line is grounded at only one point and ground to 100 W max. • Short the LG terminal of the PLC to the ground terminal (GR). • Use a wire gauge of at least 2 mm2 for the ground wire. • Refer to the manual for individual Communications Units for details on proper wiring procedures. 2. Do not ground the functional ground (FG: ) of the PT if it is mounted to the same panel as devices that generate noise, such as motors or inverters, as shown in Figure (b). Precautions for Safe Use Ground correctly to prevent the PT from malfunctioning due to noise. Preparing the Shield of RS-422A/485 Connectors Always prepare RS-422A/485 cable shields properly. Ground only one end of the shield when connecting the ground terminal (GR) of the devices to the functional ground (FG: ), and grounding each signal line at only one point and to 100 W max, as shown in Figure (a). Ground both ends of the shield when not grounding the functional ground (FG: ure (b). Precautions for Safe Use ) of the PT, as shown in Fig- Process the cable shields correctly to prevent the PT from malfunctioning due to noise. Example of Recommended Wiring CPU Rack CPU Rack CPU Unit Power or supply Communi- Unit cations LG Unit CPU Unit Power or supply Communi- Unit cations LG Unit GR GR Signal line Signal line PT RS-422A/485 FG PT RS-422A/485 FG 249 Appendix C Connecting to RS-422A/485 Connection Example An example of connecting a PLC and a PT using an RS-232C/RS-422A Converter is shown below. Use the wiring example as reference for correct wiring. CPU Rack Built-in RS-232C port on PCU unit PT (unit No. 0) RS-422A Converter (CJ1W-CIF11) 1:N NT Link Wiring Example PT (Unit No.0) CPU Rack CJ1W-CIF11 DIP switch settings FG SDB+ SDA− RDB+ RDA− OFF (RS-422A) OFF (RS-422A) ON (Yes) (Not used.) FG SDB+ SDA− ON (Yes) OFF (4-wire) OFF (4-wire) OFF OFF (None) OFF (None) RDB+ Terminating resistance 2/4-wire 2/4-wire Not used RD control SD control RDA− SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 Note Refer to Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables for information on processing the shield wire on the RS-442A/485 cable. Use the following connection cables. Manufacturer Tachii Electric Wire Co., Ltd. HIRAKAWA HEWTECH CORP. 250 Model TKV VBS3P-03 CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2 Appendix D Preparing Connecting Cables Use the following procedure to prepare connecting cables. Cable Preparation 1. Cut the cables to the required length. 2. Remove the vinyl cable covering using a razor blade or other tool. Use care not to damage the shield (braided mesh). 3. Cut the shield using scissors. 4. Strip back to the core of each wire using a stripper. 5. Bend back the shields. 6. Wrap the section of the shields that is bent back with aluminum foil tape. 1 2 40 (RS-232C) 25 (RS-422A/RS-485) 3 10 4 5 5 6 (Unit: mm) Aluminum foil tape Soldering 1. Pass a heat-shrinking tube over each wire. 2. Pre-solder each wire and connector terminal. 3. Solder each of the wires to the connector terminals. 1 mm Soldering iron Heat-shrinking tube Internal diameter:1.5 Length = 10 251 Appendix D Preparing Connecting Cables 4. Replace the heat-shrinking tube up to the soldered section, and shrink the tube onto the wire by applying heat using a soldering gun. Heat-shrinking tube Hood Assembly Assemble the hood as shown in the following diagram. Aluminum foil tape End with Connector End without Connector Preparing Connecting Cables for Host Connection Refer to the following information when preparing the connecting cables for connecting the PT to the host. Wiring Layout between PT COM1 Serial Port and Host (RS-232C) 6 1 PT Signal Pin No. Pin No. Signal FG Connector food Connector food FG - 1 2 SD SD 2 3 RD RD 3 4 RS RS 4 5 CS RS-232C connector 9 5 Host Shield CS 5 6 - +5V 6 7 - - 7 8 - - 8 9 SG SG 9 1 6 5 9 RS-232C connector 9-pin connector 9-pin connector Wiring Layout between PT COM2 Serial Port and Host (RS-422A) PT Host RS-422A cable PT RS-422A terminal block Host Signal Signal RDA(-) RDA(-) RDB(+) RDB(+) SDA(-) SDA(-) SDB(+) SDB(+) FG FG Shield When connecting individual signals with twisted-pair cable, connect RDA and RDB, and SDA and SDB, as pairs in the twisted-pair cable. A communications error may occur if the pairs are not combined correctly. 252 Appendix D Preparing Connecting Cables Wiring Layout between PT Serial Port COM2 and Host (RS-485) PT Host RS-485 PT RS-485 terminal block Host Signal Signal RDA(-) RDA(-) RDB(+) RDB(+) SDA(-) SDA(-) SDB(+) SDB(+) FG FG Shield Wiring Layout to CS1G/H Serial Communications Boards, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) Communications Boards, CQM1H Serial Communications Boards, and CVM1/CV Series Host Link Units Applicable Units: CS1G-CPU42(-V1), CS1G-CPU43(-V1), CS1G-CPU44(-V1), CS1G-CPU45(-V1), CS1H-CPU63(-V1), CS1H-CPU64(-V1), CS1H-CPU65(-V1), CS1H-CPU66(-V1), CS1H-CPU67(-V1), C200HE-CPU32(-Z), C200HE-CPU42(-Z), C200HG-CPU33(-Z), C200HG-CPU43(-Z), C200HG-CPU53(-Z), C200HG-CPU63(-Z), C200HX-CPU34(-Z), C200HX-CPU44(-Z), C200HX-CPU54(-Z), C200HX-CPU64(-Z), C200HX-CPU65-Z, C200HX-CPU85-Z, CQM1H-CPU51, CQM1H-CPU61, CV500-LK201(COM port 2) PLC PT Signal RS-422A terminal block Shield Hood FG RDB(+) 1 SDA(-) RDA(-) 1 6 5 9 Signal Pin No. SDA(-) 2 SDB(+) SDB(+) 3 - FG 4 - 5 - 6 RDA(-) 7 - 8 RDB(+) 9 - RS-422A connector 9-pin type For details on processing shielded cable, refer to Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables. Wiring Layout to CVM1/CV-series CPU Units Applicable Units: CV500-CPU01-V1, CV1000-CPU01-V1, CV2000-CPU01-V1, CVM1-CPU01-V@, CVM1-CPU11-V@, CVM1-CPU21-V@ CVM1/CV Series CPU Units without the -V@ suffix cannot be connected by any communications method. 253 Appendix D Preparing Connecting Cables PLC PT Signal Pin No. Shield RDA(-) RS-422A terminal block 1 6 5 9 Signal Hood FG RDB(+) 1 SDA(-) SDB(+) SDA(-) 2 SDB(+) 3 - FG 4 RS 5 CS 6 RDA(-) 7 - 8 RDB(+) 9 - RS-422A connector 9-pin type For details on processing shielded cable, refer to Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables. Wiring Layout to EJ1 Modular Temperature Controller EJ1 PT RS-485 cable EJ1 PT RS-485 terminal block Signal Signal RDA(-) A(-) RDB(+) B(+) SDA(-) SDB(+) FG Shield To next EJ1 For details on processing shielded cable, refer to Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables. Preparing Cables for Computer Connection Refer to the following information when preparing the NP-Designer connecting cables. Wire the RS-232C connector to the DOS computer according to the type, as follows: SD RD Computer RS CS SG FG 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 CS 7 9 SG 1 SD RD RS PT serial port Shield Connector hood Connector hood Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable. Name Connector 254 Model Details XM2D-2501 25-pin type Manufactured by OMRON (computer side) XM2A-0901 9-pin type Manufactured by OMRON (PT side) Appendix D Preparing Connecting Cables Name Connector hood Cable Model XM2S-2511 Details 25-pin type Manufactured by OMRON (computer side) XM2S-0911 9-pin type, mm screws Manufactured by OMRON (PT side) AWG28 × 5P IFVV-SB Multiconductor shielded cable Manufactured by Fujikura Densen. CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG Multiconductor shielded cable Manufactured by Hitachi Densen. 9-pin Connector SD RD Computer RS CS SG 3 2 2 3 7 4 8 5 CS 5 9 SG SD RD RS PT serial port Shield Connector hood Connector hood Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable. Name Connector Model XM2D-0901 XM2A-0901 Connector hood (See note.) Cable XM2S-0911 Details 9-pin type Manufactured by OMRON (computer side) 9-pin type Manufactured by OMRON (PT side) 9-pin type, mm screws Manufactured by OMRON. XM2S-0913 9-pin type, inch screws Manufactured by OMRON. AWG28 × 5P IFVV-SB Multiconductor shielded cable Manufactured by Fujikura Densen. CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG Multiconductor shielded cable Manufactured by Hitachi Densen. Note Use a connector hood for the computer that conforms to the standards for the screws of the computer connector. 255 Preparing Connecting Cables 256 Appendix D Appendix E Standard Models Programmable Terminals (PTs) Model LCD Case NP5-SQ000B Type FSTN Size 5.7 inch Color 256 colors Number of dots Color 320 × 240 Black NP5-SQ000 NP5-SQ001B FSTN FSTN 5.7 inch 5.7 inch 256 colors 256 colors 320 × 240 320 × 240 Silver Black NP5-SQ001 NP5-MQ000B FSTN FSTN 5.7 inch 5.7 inch 256 colors Monochrome 320 × 240 320 × 240 Silver Black NP5-MQ000 NP5-MQ001B FSTN FSTN 5.7 inch 5.7 inch Monochrome Monochrome 320 × 240 320 × 240 Silver Black NP5-MQ001 NP3-MQ000B FSTN STN 5.7 inch 3.8 inch Monochrome Monochrome 320 × 240 320 × 240 Silver Black NP3-MQ000 NP3-MQ001B STN STN 3.8 inch 3.8 inch Monochrome Monochrome 320 × 240 320 × 240 Silver Black NP3-MQ001 STN 3.8 inch Monochrome 320 × 240 Silver Serial Communications Units Model CS1W-SCU21 Specifications • RS-232C (2 ports) • Base-mounting type Applicable PLC CS-series CS1G/H and CS1G/H-H CS1W-SCU41 • RS-232C (1 port) • RS-422A (1 port) • Base-mounting type • RS-232C (1 port) • RS-422A (1 port) • Building-block type CS-series CS1G/H and CS1G/H-H CJ1W-SCU41 CJ-series CJ1G/H-H and CJ1M CPU Units That Connect to PTs in 1:1 NT Links PLC Series Specifications C200HE/HG/HX Series CQM1(H) Series With RS-232C connector (switching/9-pin type) With RS-232C connector (9-pin type) CPM1A Series CPM2A Series Connects to RS-232C cable using RS-232C Adapter CPM1-CIF01. With RS-232C connector (9-pin type) CPM2C Series Connects to RS-232C connector branched using CPM2C-CN111 with converting cable. With RS-232C connector (switching/9-pin type) CVM1/CV Series CPU Units That Connect in 1:1 NT Links via RS-232C to PT Serial Ports PLC Series C Series CPU Units with built-in 1:1 NT Link functionality C200HE-CPU42 (-Z) CPU Units that connect via optional Communications Boards C200HE-CPU32 (-Z) (See note 1.) C200HE-CPU42 (-Z) (See note 1.) 257 Appendix E Standard Models PLC Series C Series CPU Units with built-in 1:1 NT Link functionality C200HG-CPU43(-Z) C200HG-CPU63(-Z) CPU Units that connect via optional Communications Boards C200HG-CPU33(-Z) (See note 1.) C200HG-CPU43(-Z) (See note 1.) C200HG-CPU53(-Z) (See note 1.) C200HG-CPU63(-Z) (See note 1.) C200HX-CPU44(-Z) C200HX-CPU64(-Z) C200HX-CPU65-Z C200HX-CPU85-Z C200HX-CPU34(-Z) (See note 1.) C200HX-CPU44(-Z) (See note 1.) C200HX-CPU54(-Z) (See note 1.) C200HX-CPU64(-Z) (See note 1.) C200HX-CPU65-Z C200HX-CPU85-Z --- CQM1-CPU41-V1 CQM1-CPU42-V1 CQM1-CPU43-V1 CQM1-CPU44-V1 CQM1-CPU45-EV1 CPM1A-10CD@-@ (-V1) CPM1A-20CD@-@ (-V1) CPM1A-30CD@-@ (-V1) CPM1A-40CD@-@ (-V1) --- CPM2A-30CD@@-@ CPM2A-40CD@@-@ CPM2A-60CD@@-@ --- CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@ (See note 4.) CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@ (See note 4.) --- CQM1H-CPU21 (See note 2.) CQM1H-CPU51 (See note 2.) CQM1H-CPU61 (See note 2.) --- CV Series (See note CV500-CPU01-V1 3.) CV1000-CPU01-V1 CV2000-CPU01-V1 CVM1 Series (See CVM1-CPU01-V2 note 3.) CVM1-CPU11-V2 CVM1-CPU21-V2 Note --- --- (1) A C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-V1 Communications Board is required. (2) A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required. (3) Connection is not possible to CVM1/CV-series PLC CPU Units without “-V1” in the model number. (4) A CS1W-CN118 Conversion Cable or XW2Z-200T-2 Cable with connector must be used for the connection. Precautions for Correct Use 258 CS-series CPU Units cannot connect to 1:1 NT Links, but a 1:1 connection can be made using 1:N NT Links (normal or high-speed). Refer to 3-5 Connecting with 1:N NT Links and 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Links for details. Appendix E Standard Models CPU Units That Connect in 1:1 NT Links via RS-422A/485 to PT Serial Ports PLC Series CPU Units with built-in 1:1 NT Link functionality C200HE-CPU32 (-Z) (See note 1.) C200HE-CPU42 (-Z) (See note 1.) C Series C200HG-CPU33 (-Z) (See note 1.) C200HG-CPU43 (-Z) (See note 1.) C200HG-CPU53 (-Z) (See note 1.) C200HG-CPU63 (-Z) (See note 1.) C200HX-CPU34 (-Z) (See note 1.) C200HX-CPU44 (-Z) (See note 1.) C200HX-CPU54 (-Z) (See note 1.) C200HX-CPU64 (-Z) (See note 1.) C200HX-CPU65-Z (See note 1.) C200HX-CPU85-Z (See note 1.) CQM1H-CPU51 (See note 2.) CQM1H-CPU61 (See note 2.) CV500-CPU01-V1 CV1000-CPU01-V1 CV2000-CPU01-V1 CV Series (See note 3.) CVM1 Series (See note 3 and 4.) Note CVM1-CPU01-V2 CVM1-CPU11-V2 CVM1-CPU21-V2 (1) A C200HW-COM03-V1 or C200HW-COM06-V1 Communications Board is required. (2) A C200HW-COM03-V1 or C200HW-COM06-V1 Communications Board is required. (3) Connection is not possible to CVM1/CV-series PLC CPU Units without “-V1” in the model number. (4) Connect using RS-422A CPU Units That Connect to PTs in Standard 1:N NT Links Model Specifications CP Series Connecting to RS-232C cable using RS-232C Option Board (CP1W-CIF01). Connecting RS-422A/485 Option Board (CP1W-CIF11). C200HE/HG/HX Series CQM1H Series With RS-232C connector (switching/9-pin type) With RS-232C connector (9-pin type) CS Series CJ Series With RS-232C connector (9-pin type) With RS-232C connector (9-pin type) 259 Appendix E Standard Models CPU Units That Connect in 1:N NT Links via RS-232C to PT Serial Ports PLC Series Connecting with built-in ports CP Series --- CS Series CS1G-CPU42(-V1) CS1G-CPU43(-V1) CS1G-CPU44(-V1) CS1G-CPU45(-V1) CS1H-CPU63(-V1) CS1H-CPU64(-V1) CS1H-CPU65(-V1) CS1H-CPU66(-V1) CS1H-CPU67(-V1) CS1G-CPU42H CS1G-CPU43H CS1G-CPU44H CS1G-CPU45H CS1H-CPU63H CS1H-CPU64H CS1H-CPU65H CS1H-CPU66H CS1H-CPU67H CS1D-CPU65H CS1D-CPU67H CJ1H-CPU65H (See note 2.) CJ1H-CPU66H (See note 2.) CJ1G-CPU42H (See note 2.) CJ1G-CPU43H (See note 2.) CJ1G-CPU44H (See note 2.) CJ1G-CPU45H (See note 2.) CJ1M-CPU11 CJ1M-CPU12 CJ1M-CPU13 CJ1M-CPU21 CJ1M-CPU22 CJ1M-CPU23 C200HE-CPU42(-Z) CJ Series C Series C200HG-CPU43(-Z) C200HG-CPU63(-Z) Note Connecting via optional Communications Boards CP1L-L14D/L20D/M30D/M40D (See note 1.) CP1H-X/XA/Y Same as at left. (See note 2.) Same as at left. (See note 3.) C200HE-CPU32(-Z) (See note 4.) C200HE-CPU42(-Z) (See note 4.) C200HG-CPU33(-Z) (See note 4.) C200HG-CPU43(-Z) (See note 4.) C200HG-CPU53(-Z) (See note 4.) C200HG-CPU63(-Z) (See note 4.) C200HX-CPU44(-Z) C200HX-CPU64(-Z) C200HX-CPU65-Z C200HX-CPU85-Z C200HX-CPU34(-Z) (See note 4.) C200HX-CPU44(-Z) (See note 4.) C200HX-CPU54(-Z) (See note 4.) C200HX-CPU64(-Z) (See note 4.) C200HX-CPU65-Z (See note 4.) C200HX-CPU85-Z (See note 4.) --- CQM1H-CPU21 (See note 5.) CQM1H-CPU51 (See note 5.) CQM1H-CPU61 (See note 5.) (1) CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C option board is required. (2) A CS1W-SCB21/SCB41 Serial Communications Board or a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required. (3) A CJ1W -SCU41 Serial Communications Unit is required. (4) A C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06(-V1) Communications Board is required. (5) A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required. 260 Appendix E Standard Models CPU Units That Connect in 1:N NT Links via RS-442A/485 to PT Serial Ports PLC Series Unit Serial Communications Board or Unit required for connection CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board CP Series CP1L-L14D CP1L-L20D CP1L-M30D CP1L-M40D CP1H-X CP1H-XA CP1H-Y CS Series CS1G-CPU42(-V1) CS1G-CPU43(-V1) CS1G-CPU44(-V1) CS1G-CPU45(-V1) CS1H-CPU63(-V1) CS1H-CPU64(-V1) CS1H-CPU65(-V1) CS1H-CPU66(-V1) CS1H-CPU67(-V1) CS1G-CPU42H CS1G-CPU43H CS1G-CPU44H CS1G-CPU45H CS1H-CPU63H CS1H-CPU64H CS1H-CPU65H CS1H-CPU66H CS1H-CPU67H CS1D-CPU65H CS1D-CPU67H CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board CJ Series CJ1G-CPU42H CJ1G-CPU43H CJ1G-CPU44H CJ1G-CPU45H CJ1M-CPU11 CJ1M-CPU12 CJ1M-CPU13 CJ1M-CPU21 CJ1M-CPU22 CJ1M-CPU23 CJ1H-CPU65H CJ1H-CPU66H C200HE-CPU32(-Z) C200HE-CPU42(-Z) CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit C Series C200HG-CPU33(-Z) C200HG-CPU43(-Z) C200HG-CPU53(-Z) C200HG-CPU63(-Z) C200HX-CPU34(-Z) C200HX-CPU44(-Z) C200HX-CPU54(-Z) C200HX-CPU64(-Z) C200HX-CPU65-Z C200HX-CPU85-Z CQM1H-CPU21 CQM1H-CPU51 CQM1H-CPU61 C200HW-COM03/COM06(-V1) Communications Board CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board Reference Both the normal 1:N NT Links and high-speed NT Links are supported for CS-series PLC CPU Units with “-V1” in the model number. If a Serial Communications Unit or Board with Lot.991220 or later is used, these connections are also sup-ported by CPU Units without “-V1.” Refer to 3-6 High-speed 1:N NT Links for de-tails. 261 Appendix E Standard Models CPU Units That Connect to PTs in High-speed 1:N NT Links Model CP Series Specifications Connecting to RS-232C cable using a CP1W-CIF01RS-232C Option Board Connecting RS-422A/485 Option Board (CP1W-CIF11). CS Series (See note.) CJ Series With RS-232C connector (9-pin type) With RS-232C connector (9-pin type) Note Connection is not possible for CPU Units without “-V1” in the model number. CPU Units That Connect in 1:N NT Links via RS-232C to PT Serial Ports PLC Series Connecting with built-in ports Connecting via optional Communications Boards CP Series --- CP1L-L14D/L20D/M30D/ M40D (See note 1.) CP1H-X/XA/Y CS Series CS1G-CPU42-V1 (See note 2.) CS1G-CPU43-V1 (See note 2.) CS1G-CPU44-V1 (See note 2.) CS1G-CPU45-V1 (See note 2.) CS1H-CPU63-V1 (See note 2.) CS1H-CPU64-V1 (See note 2.) CS1H-CPU65-V1 (See note 2.) CS1H-CPU66-V1 (See note 2.) CS1H-CPU67-V1 (See note 2.) CS1G-CPU42H CS1G-CPU43H CS1G-CPU44H CS1G-CPU45H CS1H-CPU63H CS1H-CPU64H CS1H-CPU65H CS1H-CPU66H CS1H-CPU67H CS1D-CPU65H CS1D-CPU67H Same as at left. (See note 3.) CJ Series CJ1G-CPU42H CJ1G-CPU43H CJ1G-CPU44H CJ1G-CPU45H CJ1M-CPU11 CJ1M-CPU12 CJ1M-CPU13 CJ1M-CPU21 CJ1M-CPU22 CJ1M-CPU23 CJ1H-CPU65H CJ1H-CPU66H Same as at left. (See note 4.) Note (1) CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C option board is required. (2) CS-series PLC CPU Units without “-V1” in the model number do not support high-speed NT Links. (3) A CS1W-SCB21/SCB41 Serial Communications Board or a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required. (4) A CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Board is required. 262 Appendix E Standard Models CPU Units That Connect in 1:N NT Links via RS-442A/485 to PT Serial Ports PLC Series Unit CP Series CP1L-L14D CP1L-L20D CP1L-M30D CP1L-M40D CP1H-X CP1H-XA CP1H-Y Serial Communications Board or Unit required for connection CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C Option Board CS Series CS1G-CPU42(-V1) CS1G-CPU43(-V1) CS1G-CPU44(-V1) CS1G-CPU45(-V1) CS1H-CPU63(-V1) CS1H-CPU64(-V1) CS1H-CPU65(-V1) CS1H-CPU66(-V1) CS1H-CPU67(-V1) CS1G-CPU42H CS1G-CPU43H CS1G-CPU44H CS1G-CPU45H CS1H-CPU63H CS1H-CPU64H CS1H-CPU65H CS1H-CPU66H CS1H-CPU67H CS1D-CPU65H CS1D-CPU67H CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board CJ Series CJ1G-CPU42H CJ1G-CPU43H CJ1G-CPU44H CJ1G-CPU45H CJ1M-CPU11 CJ1M-CPU12 CJ1M-CPU13 CJ1M-CPU21 CJ1M-CPU22 CJ1M-CPU23 CJ1H-CPU65H CJ1H-CPU66H CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit CPU Units That Connect to PTs in Host Links PLC Series Specifications C200HE/HG/HX Series CQM1(H) Series With RS-232C connector (switching/9-pin type) With RS-232C connector (9-pin type) CPM1A Series CPM2A Series Connects to RS-232C cable using RS-232C Adapter CPM1-CIF01. With RS-232C connector (9-pin type) CPM2C Series Connects to RS-232C connector branched using CPM2C-CN111 with converting cable. CVM1/CV Series CS Series With RS-232C connector (switching/9-pin type) With RS-232C connector (9-pin type) CJ Series With RS-232C connector (9-pin type) 263 Appendix E Standard Models CPU Units That Connect in Host Links via RS-232C to PT Serial Ports PLC Series CP Series C Series CPU Units with Built-in Host Link Function CP1L-L14D/L20D/M30D/ M40D CP1H-X/XA/Y ----- 264 CPU Units Connectable with Host Link Units or Expansion Communications Board Host Link Unit/ Communications Board --- CP1W-CIF01 C1000H-CPU01-EV1 C2000H-CPU01-EV1 C200HE-CPU11-E C200HE-CPU32-E C200HE-CPU42-E C200HE-CPU11-ZE C200HE-CPU32-ZE C200HE-CPU42-ZE C200HG-CPU33-E C200HG-CPU43-E C200HG-CPU53-E C200HG-CPU63-E C200HG-CPU33-ZE C200HG-CPU43-ZE C200HG-CPU53-ZE C200HG-CPU63-ZE C200HX-CPU34-E C200HX-CPU44-E C200HX-CPU54-E C200HX-CPU64-E C200HX-CPU34-ZE C200HX-CPU44-ZE C200HX-CPU54-ZE C200HX-CPU64-ZE C200HX-CPU65-ZE C200HX-CPU85-ZE C120-LK201-EV1 C200H-LK201-EV1 Appendix E Standard Models PLC Series C Series CPU Units with Built-in Host Link Function C200HE-CPU42-E C200HE-CPU42-ZE C200HG-CPU43-E C200HG-CPU63-E C200HG-CPU43-ZE C200HG-CPU63-ZE C200HX-CPU44-E C200HX-CPU64-E C200HX-CPU44-ZE C200HX-CPU64-ZE C200HX-CPU65-ZE C200HX-CPU85-ZE CV Series (See note 3.) CPU Units Connectable with Host Link Units or Expansion Communications Board C200HE-CPU32-E C200HE-CPU42-E C200HE-CPU32-ZE C200HE-CPU42-ZE Host Link Unit/ Communications Board C200HW-COM02-EV1 C200HW-COM04-EV1 C200HW-COM05-EV1 C200HW-COM06-EV1 C200HG-CPU33-E C200HG-CPU43-E C200HG-CPU53-E C200HG-CPU63-E C200HG-CPU33-ZE C200HG-CPU43-ZE C200HG-CPU53-ZE C200HG-CPU63-ZE C200HX-CPU34-E C200HX-CPU44-E C200HX-CPU54-E C200HX-CPU64-E C200HX-CPU34-ZE C200HX-CPU44-ZE C200HX-CPU54-ZE C200HX-CPU64-ZE C200HX-CPU65-ZE C200HX-CPU85-ZE --- C1000H-CPU01-EV1 C2000H-CPU01-EV1 C500-LK201-EV1 --- C1000H-CPU01-EV1 C1000HF-CPUA1-EV1 C2000H-CPU01-EV1 C500-LK203 CPM1-10CDR-@ CPM1-20CDR-@ +CPM1-CIF01 CPM1A-10CD@-@ CPM1A-20CD@-@ CPM1A-30CD@-@ CPM1A-40CD@-@ +CPM1-CIF01 CPM2A-30CD@@-@ CPM2A-40CD@@-@ CPM2A-60CD@@-@ +CPM1- CIF01 (Peripheral port connection) --- --- --- --- --- --- CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@ CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@ (See note1.) CQM1-CPU21-E CQM1-CPU41-EV1 CQM1-CPU42-EV1 CQM1-CPU43-EV1 CQM1-CPU44-EV1 --- --- --- --- CQM1H-CPU11 CQM1H-CPU21 CQM1H-CPU51 CQM1H-CPU61 (See note 2.) CQM1H-CPU51 CQM1H-CPU61 CQM1H-SCB41 CV500-CPU01-EV1 CV1000-CPU01-EV1 CV500-CPU01-EV1 CV1000-CPU01-EV1 CV500-LK201 CV2000-CPU01-EV1 CV2000-CPU01-EV1 265 Appendix E Standard Models PLC Series CVM1 Series (See note 3.) CS Series CJ Series SRM1 Note CPU Units with Built-in Host Link Function CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CVM1-CPU11-EV2 CVM1-CPU21-EV2 CS1G-CPU42-EV1 CS1G-CPU43-EV1 CS1G-CPU44-EV1 CS1G-CPU45-EV1 CS1H-CPU63-EV1 CS1H-CPU64-EV1 CS1H-CPU65-EV1 CS1H-CPU66-EV1 CS1H-CPU67-EV1 CS1G-CPU42H CS1G-CPU43H CS1G-CPU44H CS1G-CPU45H CS1H-CPU63H CS1H-CPU64H CS1H-CPU65H CS1H-CPU66H CS1H-CPU67H CPU Units Connectable with Host Link Units or Expansion Communications Board CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CVM1-CPU11-EV2 CVM1-CPU21-EV2 CS1G-CPU42-EV1 CS1G-CPU43-EV1 CS1G-CPU44-EV1 CS1G-CPU45-EV1 CS1H-CPU63-EV1 CS1H-CPU64-EV1 CS1H-CPU65-EV1 CS1H-CPU66-EV1 CS1H-CPU67-EV1 CS1G-CPU42H CS1G-CPU43H CS1G-CPU44H CS1G-CPU45H CS1H-CPU63H CS1H-CPU64H CS1H-CPU65H CS1H-CPU66H CS1H-CPU67H CJ1G-CPU44 CJ1G-CPU45 CJ1G-CPU42H CJ1G-CPU43H CJ1G-CPU44H CJ1G-CPU45H CJ1H-CPU65H CJ1H-CPU66H CJ1H-CPU67H CJ1M-CPU11 CJ1M-CPU12 CJ1M-CPU13 CJ1M-CPU21 CJ1M-CPU22 CJ1M-CPU23 SRM1-C02-V2 CJ1G-CPU44 CJ1G-CPU45 CJ1G-CPU42H CJ1G-CPU43H CJ1G-CPU44H CJ1G-CPU45H CJ1H-CPU65H CJ1H-CPU66H CJ1H-CPU67H CJ1M-CPU11 CJ1M-CPU12 CJ1M-CPU13 CJ1M-CPU21 CJ1M-CPU22 CJ1M-CPU23 --- Host Link Unit/ Communications Board CV500-LK201 CS1W-SCU21-V1 CS1W-SCB21-V1 CS1W-SCB41-V1 CJ1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1 --- (1) Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect. (2) The CQM1H-CPU11 does not have a built-in RS-232C port, so connect to the peripheral port to the PT with a CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable. (3) CPU Units of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix -EV@ cannot be connected. 266 Appendix E Standard Models CPU Units That Connect in Host Link via RS-422A/485 to PT Serial Ports PLC Series CPU Units with Built-in Host Link Function CPU Units Connectable with Host Link Units or Expansion Communications Board Host Link Unit/ Communications Board CP Series CP1L-L14D CP1L-L20D CP1L-M30D CP1L-M40D CP1H-X CP1H-XA CP1H-Y --- CP1W-CIF11 C Series --- C1000H-CPU01-EV1 C2000H-CPU01-EV1 C120-LK201-EV1 --- C200HE-CPU11-E C200HE-CPU32-E C200HE-CPU42-E C200HE-CPU11-ZE C200HE-CPU32-ZE C200HE-CPU42-ZE C200HG-CPU33-E C200HG-CPU43-E C200HG-CPU53-E C200HG-CPU63-E C200HG-CPU33-ZE C200HG-CPU43-ZE C200HG-CPU53-ZE C200HG-CPU63-ZE C200HX-CPU34-E C200HX-CPU44-E C200HX-CPU54-E C200HX-CPU64-E C200HX- CPU34-ZE C200HX- CPU44-ZE C200HX- CPU54-ZE C200HX- CPU64-ZE C200HX- CPU65-ZE C200HX- CPU85-ZE C200H-LK202-EV1 --- C200HE-CPU32-E C200HE-CPU42-E C200HE-CPU32-ZE C200HE-CPU42-ZE C200HW-COM03-EV1 C200HW-COM06-EV1 --- C200HG-CPU33-E C200HG-CPU43-E C200HG-CPU53-E C200HG-CPU63-E C200HG-CPU33-ZE C200HG-CPU43-ZE C200HG-CPU53-ZE C200HG-CPU63-ZE --- C200HX-CPU34-E C200HX-CPU44-E C200HX-CPU54-E C200HX-CPU64-E C200HX- CPU34-ZE C200HX- CPU44-ZE C200HX- CPU54-ZE C200HX- CPU64-ZE C200HX- CPU65-ZE C200HX- CPU85-ZE 267 Appendix E Standard Models PLC Series C Series CPU Units with Built-in Host Link Function ----- CVM1 Series (See note 2.) CS Series CJ Series 268 C500-LK201-EV1 --- CPM1A-10/20/30/40CD@-@ +CPM1-CIF11 --- --- CPM2A-30/40/60CD@@-@ +CPM1-CIF11 (Peripheral port connection) --- --- CPM2C-10/20@@@@@@-@ (See note 1.) --- --- --- CQM1H-CPU51 CQM1H-CPU61 CQM1H-SCB41 CV500-CPU01-EV1 CV1000-CPU01-EV1 CV500-CPU01-EV1 CV1000-CPU01-EV1 CV500-LK201 CV2000-CPU01-EV1 CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CVM1-CPU11-EV2 CVM1-CPU21-EV2 --- CV2000-CPU01-EV1 CVM1-CPU01-EV2 CVM1-CPU11-EV2 CVM1-CPU21-EV2 CS1G-CPU42-EV1 CS1G-CPU43-EV1 CS1G-CPU44-EV1 CS1G-CPU45-EV1 CS1H-CPU63-EV1 CS1H-CPU64-EV1 CS1H-CPU65-EV1 CS1H-CPU66-EV1 CS1H-CPU67-EV1 --- CS1G-CPU42H CS1G-CPU43H CS1G-CPU44H CS1G-CPU45H CS1H-CPU63H CS1H-CPU64H CS1H-CPU65H CS1H-CPU66H CS1H-CPU67H --- CJ1G-CPU44 CJ1G-CPU45 --- CJ1G-CPU42H CJ1G-CPU43H CJ1G-CPU44H CJ1G-CPU45H CJ1H-CPU65H CJ1H-CPU66H CJ1H-CPU67H CJ1M-CPU11 CJ1M-CPU12 CJ1M-CPU13 CJ1M-CPU21 CJ1M-CPU22 CJ1M-CPU23 --- --- SRM1 Host Link Unit/ Communications Board C1000H-CPU01-EV1 C1000HF-CPUA1-EV1 C2000H-CPU01-EV1 --- CPM1-10/20CDR-@ +CPM1-CIF11 CV Series (See note 2.) CPU Units Connectable with Host Link Units or Expansion Communications Board C1000H-CPU01-EV1 C2000H-CPU01-EV1 SRM1-C02-V2 +CPM1-CIF11 C500-LK203 CV500-LK201 CS1W-SCB41-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1 --- Appendix E Standard Models Note (1) Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect. (2) CPU Units of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix -EV@ cannot be connected. Software Related to NP-series PTs Name NP-Designer Model NP-NPDC0-V1 Details For Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4) or XP (Service Pack 2). The NP-Designer contains a transfer program and standard system program for NP-series PTs. Connecting Cables and Connectors Cable with Connector (PT-to-PLC) Model Cable length XW2Z-200T 2m XW2Z-500T XW2Z-200T-2 5m 2m XW2Z-500T-2 5m Applicable Units Units with 9-pin connector. Communications method NT Link (RS-232C only) CPM2C peripheral port NT Link (RS-232C only) Specifications 9-pin-to-9-pin 9-pin-to-CPM2C peripheral port Cable with Connector (PT-to-Personal Computer) Model Cable length XW2Z-S002 2m Applicable computer DOS computers Specifications Female 9-pin-to-male 9-pin RS-232C Connecting Cable Model Specifications AWG28 × 5P IFVV-SB Multiconductor shielded cable Manufactured by Fujikura Densen. CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG Multiconductor shielded cable Manufactured by Hitachi Densen. Applicable Connectors for RS-232C Name Connector Model XM2A-2501 XM2D-2501 XM2A-0901 Specifications 25-pin type (male), Manufactured by OMRON. 25-pin type (female), Manufactured by OMRON. (for DOS computers) 9-pin type (male), Manufactured by OMRON. XM2D-0901 9-pin type (female), Manufactured by OMRON. (for DOS computers) DB-25P 25-pin type (male), Manufactured by JAE. Provided with CV500-LK201 C200H-LK201-V1 CS/CJ Series C Series CQM1, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) CVM1/CV Series CPU unit CV500-LK201 269 Appendix E Standard Models Name Connector hood Model XM2S-2511 Specifications 25-pin type, mm screws, Manufactured by OMRON. XM2S-2513 25-pin type, inch screws, Manufactured by OMRON. XM2S-0911 9-pin type, mm screws, Manufactured C Series CQM1, by OMRON. C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) CVM1/CV Series CPU unit CV500-LK201 9-pin type, mm screws, Manufactured CS/CJ Series by OMRON. 9-pin type, inch screws, Manufactured by OMRON. XM2S-0911-E XM2S-0913 DB-C2-J9 Provided with CV500-LK201 C200H-LK201-V1 25-pin type, Manufactured by JAE. RS-422A/485 Connecting Cable Manufacturer Tachii Electric Wire Co., Ltd. Model TKV VBS3P-03 HIRAKAWA HEWTECH CORP. CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2 Cables for CS1-series PLC Peripheral Port Model CS1W-CN118 270 Specifications Manufactured by OMRON (CS1-series peripheral port-to-D-Sub female 9-pin connector) Appendix F List of Optional Products Replacement Battery This is a lithium battery for backing up the contents of the memory. Manufacturer OMRON Model CJ1W-BAT01 USB Flash Memory FAT32 formatted USB flash memory can only be connected. Manufacturer OMRON Model ZF-MEM1G Protective Sheet The NP3-KBA04 Protective Sheet keeps the display panel of the NP-series PT free from smudges and scratches. Protective Sheets have a matt finish to reduce glare from reflected light. Manufacturer OMRON Model NT30-KBA04 Remark For NP5 OMRON NP3-KBA04 For NP3 Specifications Material: Polyester film Chemical Resistance Resistance Resistant to boric acid, Hexane, Kerosene, Engine oil, Diesel oil, Lubricants, Glycerin, Silicone grease. Non-resistance Not resistant to ammonia solution, Sulfurous acid gas, Caustic potash, Sodium hydroxide, Phenol, Propylene, Nitrobenzene. 271 List of Optional Products 272 Appendix Appendix F Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the cover of the manual. Cat. No. V096-E1-03 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the previous version. Revision code Date Revised content 01 02 July 2008 January 2009 Original production Revised to correct mistakes. 03 April 2009 Revised to correct mistakes. 273 Revision History 274 Terms and Conditions of Sale 1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed part of all quotes, agreements, purchase orders, acknowledgments, price lists, catalogs, manuals, brochures and other documents, whether electronic or in writing, relating to the sale of products or services (collectively, the "Products") by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies (“Omron”). Omron objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer’s purchase order or other documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms. 2. Prices; Payment Terms. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by Omron. Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease prices on any unshipped portions of outstanding orders. Payments for Products are due net 30 days unless otherwise stated in the invoice. 3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and duties, and will be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Omron’s payment terms and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts. 4. Interest. Omron, at its option, may charge Buyer 1-1/2% interest per month or the maximum legal rate, whichever is less, on any balance not paid within the stated terms. 5. Orders. Omron will accept no order less than $200 net billing. 6. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the importation or sale of the Products. 7. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon, imposed directly or indirectly on Omron or required to be collected directly or indirectly by Omron for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation, consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder (including customs duties and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Omron. 8. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory to Omron, Omron reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Omron may (without liability and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Products sold hereunder and stop any Products in transit until Buyer pays all amounts, including amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due, which are owing to it by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts. 9. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses. 10. Force Majeure. Omron shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods, strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the requirements of any government authority. 11. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Omron: a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Omron; Omron will not drop ship except in “break down” situations. b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer; c. All sales and shipments of Products shall be FOB shipping point (unless otherwise stated in writing by Omron), at which point title and risk of loss shall pass from Omron to Buyer; provided that Omron shall retain a security interest in the Products until the full purchase price is paid; d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only; and e. Omron will package Products as it deems proper for protection against normal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions. 12. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Omron for shortage or damage to the Products occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transportation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Products from Omron in the condition claimed. 13. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Omron’s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied. (b) Limitations. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABIL- 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election, to (i) replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non-complying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty. See http://www.omron247.com or contact your Omron representative for published information. Limitation on Liability; Etc. OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY. Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted. Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron Companies and their employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, investigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Omron is a party) which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way with respect to the Products. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or settle any action brought against such Companies to the extent based on a claim that any Product made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of another party. Property; Confidentiality. Any intellectual property in the Products is the exclusive property of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Omron. Notwithstanding any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of Omron. All information and materials supplied by Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary, and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly prevent disclosure to any third party. Export Controls. Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws, regulations and licenses regarding (i) export of products or information; (iii) sale of products to “forbidden” or other proscribed persons; and (ii) disclosure to non-citizens of regulated technology or information. Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Omron in exercising any right and no course of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate as a waiver of rights by Omron. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without Omron's written consent. (c) Law. These Terms are governed by the law of the jurisdiction of the home office of the Omron company from which Buyer is purchasing the Products (without regard to conflict of law principles). (d) Amendment. These Terms constitute the entire agreement between Buyer and Omron relating to the Products, and no provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. (e) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such provision shall not invalidate any other provision. (f) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice. (g) Definitions. As used herein, “including” means “including without limitation”; and “Omron Companies” (or similar words) mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect subsidiary or affiliate thereof. Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use 1. Suitability of Use. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At Buyer’s request, Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product with respect to Buyer’s application, product or system. Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases but the following is a non-exhaustive list of applications for which particular attention must be given: (i) Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this document. (ii) Use in consumer products or any use in significant quantities. (iii) Energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations. (iv) Systems, machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Product. NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO 2. 3. 4. 5. ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON’S PRODUCT IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM. Programmable Products. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable Product, or any consequence thereof. Performance Data. Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omron’s test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations of Liability. Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product. Errors and Omissions. Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions. OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC  THE AMERICAS HEADQUARTERS  *#*'


,
 
,
  
,
+++%#'%$%m O




  O
 

 
  %'%$)%

$
,
   
,
    
,
+++%#'%$ %$%
*'
,
 OMRON ELETRÔNICA DO BRASIL LTDA 

  O
 

 
  Sã%
P*"%

'(!"
,
 
,
+++%#'%$%#' $)!%
   O
 






  OTHER OMRON LATIN AMERICA SALES &%

,
  
,
#"%#'%$%#    V096-E1-03 4/09 Note: Specifications are subject to change. © 2008 Omron Electronics LLC Printed in U.S.A.